CD RECEIVER
KD-A305/KD-R300
KD-A305/KD-R300
KD-A305/KD-R300
RECEPTOR CON CD
RÉCEPTEUR CD
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.
Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 7.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 7.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
For customer Use:
Enter below the Model
No. and Serial No. which
are located on the top or
bottom of the cabinet. Retain
this information for future
reference.
INSTRUCTIONS
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
Model No.
Serial No.
GET0570-001A
[J]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to reset your unit
CONTENTS
OPERATIONS
Basic operations...........................................
• Using the control panel...............................
• Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)......
Preparation..................................................
Listening to the radio...................................
Disc operations.............................................
4
4
5
7
8
9
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased (except the
registered Bluetooth device, see page 10).
EXTERNAL DEVICES
How to forcibly eject a disc
Using the Bluetooth® devices....................... 10
• Using the Bluetooth cellular phone ............ 12
• Using the Bluetooth audio player ............... 13
Listening to the HD Radio™ Broadcast ......... 14
Listening to the CD changer ......................... 15
Listening to the satellite radio ..................... 16
Listening to the iPod.................................... 18
Listening to the other external
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
Detaching the control panel
components.............................................. 19
SETTINGS
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 20
Title assignment .......................................... 21
Bluetooth settings ....................................... 22
Menu operations.......................................... 23
Color settings............................................... 26
Attaching the control panel
REFERENCES
More about this unit .................................... 27
Troubleshooting........................................... 30
Maintenance................................................ 35
Specifications............................................... 36
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to
avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of
the output level.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operations
Using the control panel
1
• FM/AM: Select preset station.
• HD RADIO: Select channel.
• SIRIUS/XM: Select category.
• CD/CD-CH: Select folder.
• IPOD: Enter the main menu/Pause playback/
Confirm selection.
8
9
p
q
w
Eject disc.
Select the sound mode.
Detach the panel.
Change the display information.
• FM/AM/HD RADIO/SIRIUS/XM: Search for
station/channel.
• BT-PHONE/BT-AUDIO: Enter/go back to
previous Bluetooth menu.
• CD/CD-CH: Select track.
• IPOD: Select track.
2
3
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).
• Turn off the power [Hold].
• BT-PHONE/BT-AUDIO: Select setting item/
registered device.
Return to the previous menu.
Remote sensor
e
r
t
Select the source.
FM/HD RADIO FM*1 = AM/HD RADIO AM*1, *2
= SIRIUS*3/XM*3 = CD*3 = CD-CH*3/
IPOD*3 (or EXT INPUT) = BT-PHONE*3 = BT-
AUDIO*3 = AUX IN*2 = (back to the beginning)
• Enter list operations.
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
1
*
When the HD Radio tuner box is connected, the
built-in tuner of this unit will be disabled. To listen
to the HD Radio broadcast, refer to “Listening to the
radio” on page 8. For more features, see page 14.
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 26).
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready
or not connected.
4
5
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*4
• Confirm the selection [Press].*4
• FM/HD Radio: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*4
• CD/CD-CH/IPOD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*4
Loading slot
2
*
3
*
6
7
4
Display window
*
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.
You can change the display and button illumination (see “COLOR” on page 24).
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display window
1
2
3
Bluetooth indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Status of Bluetooth device
(Device number, [P: 1 – 5]; signal strength,
7
8
9
p
HD (HD Radio) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
LOUD (loudness) indicator
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
Main display
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
HOLD indicator
[
: 0 – 3]*; battery reminder, [ : 0 – 3]*)
* As the number increases, the signal/battery power
becomes stronger.
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Time countdown indicator
Playback source indicators—CH (CD changer), DISC
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,
ROCK, POPS, USER
q
w
4
e
r
5
6
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),
MO (monaural)
Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)
Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)
For USA-California Only:
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery
which contains Perchlorate Material—special
handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Caution:
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire, or the like.
If the effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace the battery.
Remote sensor
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcOh APnEdRDAoTwInOloNaSd.
5
7
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to the satellite radio:
– Changes the channels if pressed briefly.
– Changes the channels rapidly if pressed and
held.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
• Reverse skip/forward skip for Bluetooth audio.
1
2
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
• Changes the tuner/HD Radio preset stations.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.
• While playing an MP3 disc on an
MP3-compatible CD changer:
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.
• While listening to the satellite (SIRIUS or XM)
radio:
Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such
as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long
time.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot
reach.
• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,
or dispose of it in a fire.
• Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
– Changes the categories.
• While listening to an Apple iPod:
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
3
4
5
6
Adjusts the volume level.
Selects the sound mode.
Selects the source.
For Bluetooth cellular phone:
– Answers calls if pressed briefly.
– Rejects calls if pressed and held.
KD-A305 is equipped with the steering wheel
remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate
volume) for connection.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
Cancel the display demonstration and set the clock
• See also page 23.
Turn on the power.
1
Cancel the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2
Set the clock
Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust
the minute.
[Turn] = [Press]
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
When the power is turned off: Check the current clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to
“CLOCK OFF,” (see page 23)
When the power is turned on: Change the display information of the current source
FM/AM
Station name*1 = Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)
CD/CD-CH
Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*2 = Track title*2 = Current track number with the
elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time = (back
to the beginning)
MP3/WMA:
Album name/performer (folder name)*3 = Track title (file name)*3 =
Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
IPOD
Folder name = Track name = Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current
track number with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
HD RADIO
SIRIUS/XM
1
Call Sign*4 = Frequency = Title/artist/album name of the current segment*5 = Clock =
(back to the beginning)
Category name = Channel name = Artist name = Composer name*6 = Song/program
name/title = Clock = (back to the beginning)
*
*
*
If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 21.
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
2
3
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 24),
folder name and file name appear.
4
5
6
*
*
*
“****-FM” or “****” appears when no Call Sign is received.
“NO TEXT” appears when no text is received.
Only for SIRIUS Satellite radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcOh APnEdRDAoTwInOloNaSd.
7
Listening to the radio
Select “FM” or “AM.”
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,
then press it repeatedly.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”
lights up on the display.
When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
• See also page 24.
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
1
While listening to a station...
[Turn] = [Press]
2
Select the preset number range you want to
store.
Select “TUNER” = “MONO”
= “MONO ON”
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• “MO” lights up on the display.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator
goes off.
3
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically.
• If an HD Radio tuner box is connected, you can also
search and store the AM stations.
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations
3
for AM.
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset
number “04.”
Selecting preset station
1
or
2
Select preset number “04.”
[Turn] = [Press]
Disc operations
Turn on the power.
Insert a disc.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change
the source or eject the disc.
1
2
Stop playing and ejecting the disc
Selecting a track/folder
• “NO DISC” appears.
Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Prohibiting disc ejection
[Turn] = [Press]
• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder, then
the desired track by performing the control dial.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcOh APnEdRDAoTwInOloNaSd.
9
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you
to...
Using the Bluetooth®
devices
MP3/WMA: Select folder
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect
the Bluetooth adapter (KS-BTA200) (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this
unit.
[Press]Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to check
the countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
To use a Bluetooth device through the unit
(“BT-PHONE” and “BT-AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
2
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
[Turn] = [Press]
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“BT-PHONE” and “BT-AUDIO”).
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Registering a Bluetooth device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Use either of the following items in the Bluetooth menu
to register and establish the connection with a device.
• Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO” as the source to
operate the Bluetooth menu.
REPEAT
TRACK RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
FOLDER RPT
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder
RANDOM
OPEN
Make the unit ready to establish a new
Bluetooth connection.
FOLDER RND
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all
tracks of current folder, then tracks
of next folders
Connection is established by operating the
Bluetooth device.
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
SEARCH Make the unit ready to establish a new
Bluetooth connection.
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Connection is established by operating
the unit.
10 OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering using “OPEN”
Preparation: Operate the device to turn on its
5
Use the Bluetooth device to search and
connect.
On the device to be connected, enter the same
PIN code you have just entered for this unit.
“CONNECTED” appears on the display.
Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.
Bluetooth function.
1
2
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
Select “NEW DEVICE.”
The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use “CONNECT“ (or activate
“AUTO CNNCT”) to connect the same device from
next time on. (See the following and page 22.)
3
4
Select “OPEN.”
Connecting a device
Perform steps 1 and 2 on left column, then...
1
• Select “SEARCH” to search for available
devices.
The unit searches and displays the list of the
available devices. If no available device is
detected, “UNFOUND” appears.
• Select “SPECIAL” to connect a special
device.
Enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number)
code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number). [Initial: 0000]
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
1
Move to the next (or previous) number
position.
2
3
Select a device you want to connect.
2
Select a number.
• For available devices...
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to the
unit.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering a PIN code.
Confirm the entry.
Use the Bluetooth device to connect.
Now connection is established and you can use
the device through the unit.
“OPEN..” flashes on the display.
• For special device...
Use “OPEN” or “SEARCH” to connect.
Continued on the next page
EXTERNAL DEVICES 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
• Select “CONNECT” or “DISCONNECT” to
connect/disconnect the selected device.
• Select “DELETE,” then “YES” to delete the
selected device.
Connecting/disconnecting/deleting a
registered device
1
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
2
Select a registered device you want to
connect/disconnect/delete.
You can set the unit to connect the Bluetooth device
automatically when the unit is turned on. (See
“AUTO CNNCT” on page 22.)
Using the Bluetooth cellular phone
Select “BT-PHONE.”
1
2
Enter the Bluetooth menu.
Make a call or setting using the Bluetooth setting menu.
(See the following and page 22.)
3
—
When a call comes in....
When a text message comes in....
The source is automatically changed to “BT-PHONE.”
• The display will flash in blue (see “RING COLOR”
on page 24 for setting.)
If the cellular phone is compatible with text message
(notified through JVC Bluetooth adapter) and “MSG
INFO” (message info) is set to “AUTO” (see page 22), the
unit rings to inform you of the message arrival.
• “RCV MESSAGE” (receiving message) appears on
the display and the display illuminate in blue (see
“RING COLOR” on page 24 for setting).
When “AUTO ANSWER” is activated....
The unit answers the incoming calls automatically, see
page 22.
• When “AUTO ANSWER” is deactivated, press any
button (except
incoming call.
/
/0) to answer the
Making a call
• You can adjust the microphone volume level (see
page 22).
You can make a call using the following methods.
Select “BT-PHONE,” then follow the following steps to
make a call:
To end the call
Hold any button (except
/
/0).
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
1
Enter the “DIAL” menu.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Speak the name you want to call.
• If your cellular phone does not support the
voice recognition system, “ERROR” appears
on the display.
• Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy
environment or during an emergency.
2
Select a calling method.
Call history:
1
Select a call history (REDIAL*, RECEIVED*,
MISSED*).
2
Then select a name (if it is acquired) or phone
number.
Using the Bluetooth audio
player
Select “BT-AUDIO.”
If playback does not start, operate
the Bluetooth audio player to start
playback.
Phone book:
1
Select “PHONE BOOK*”.
• Operate the Bluetooth audio
player to pause (if playback does
not pause when you change the
source).
The list of phone number appears.
Select a name from the list.
2
Direct dialing:
Reverse skip/forward skip
1
Select “NUMBER.”
Pause/start playback*
* Operation may be different
according to the connected
Bluetooth audio player.
2
Enter the phone number.
Enter setting menu (Device list)
• Refer also to page 12 for connecting/disconnecting/
deleting a registered device.
Bluetooth Information:
* Displays only when your cellular phone is equipped
If you wish to receive more information about
Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English
website only)
with these functions and is compatible with this unit.
Voice dialing:
1
Select “VOICE DIAL.”
“SAY NAME” appears on the display.
EXTERNAL DEVICES 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the HD Radio™ Broadcast
Before operating, connect HD Radio tuner box,
KT-HD300 (separately purchased) to the CD changer
jack on the rear of the unit.
Searching for HD Radio stations
only
What is HD Radio Technology?
HD Radio Technology can deliver high-quality digital
sound—AM digital will have FM-like quality (in stereo)
and FM digital will have CD-like quality—with static-
free and clear reception. Furthermore, stations can offer
text and data, such as artist names and song titles.
• When the HD Radio tuner box is connected, it can also
receive conventional analog broadcasts.
• Many HD Radio stations also offer more than one
channel of programming. This service is called
multicasting.
Changing HD Radio reception
mode
While receiving an HD Radio broadcast, the unit
receives digital or analog audio automatically due to
the receiving condition.
While listening to an HD Radio station...
• See also page 24.
• To find HD Radio stations in your area, visit
<http://www.hdradio.com/>.
Refer also to pages 8 and 9 for basic radio
operations.
When receiving an HD Radio
station...
[Turn] = [Press]
[Lights up] When digital audio is broadcast
[Flashes] When analog audio is broadcast
Select “TUNER” = “BLEND HOLD”
= “AUTO”/”DIGITAL”/”ANALOG”
[Lights up] When holding the digital reception
[Flashes] When holding the analog reception
Station Call Sign appears.
When receiving HD Radio multicast
channels...
• If no sound can be heard with AUTO, change the
setting to ANALOG or DIGITAL.
• The setting automatically changes to AUTO if you
tuned in to or change to another station, or if you
turned off the power.
• This setting cannot take effect for the conventional
FM/AM stations.
First four letters of Call Sign
Channel number
Select your desired channel.
• If the radio station forces the reception mode to
digital, the HOLD indicator flashes.
“LINKING” appears while linking to a multicast channel.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer (separately purchased) with your unit. You can connect
a CD changer to the CD changer jack on the rear of the unit.
• You can only play conventional CDs (including CD Text) and MP3 discs.
Preparation: Make sure “CH / IPOD” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 26.
Select “CD-CH.”
1
2
Enter the list mode.
Select a disc, folder, then the track.
Playback starts automatically.
• If there is no disc on the selected tray, the unit beeps.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
• To select a desired folder/track to start playback (for MP3 discs), repeat step 2 and 3 above until the desired
folder/track is selected. The selection always start from disc number first.
MP3: Select folders
REPEAT
TRACK RPT
FOLDER RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
MP3: Repeats all tracks of current
folder
[Press] Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
DISC RPT
:
Repeats all tracks of the current
disc
RANDOM
Selecting the playback modes
FOLDER RND
:
MP3: Randomly plays all tracks of
the current folder, then tracks of
the next folder
1
2
DISC RND
ALL RND
:
:
Randomly plays all tracks of current
disc
Randomly plays all tracks of the
discs in the magazine
[Turn] = [Press]
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
EXTERNAL DEVICES 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the satellite radio
Before operating, connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of
this unit.
• JVC SIRIUS satellite radio System, SC-C1 and KS-SRA100, PnP, SC-VDOC1 and KS-SRA100, for listening to the
SIRIUS Satellite radio.
• XM satellite radio System, JVC Smart Digital Adapter–XMDJVC100, CNP2000UC and CNPJVC1 for listening to
the XM Satellite radio.
GCI (Global Control Information) update
• If channels are updated after subscription, updating starts automatically. “UPDATING” flashes and no sound can be
heard.
• Update takes a few minutes to complete.
• During update, you cannot operate your satellite radio.
Activate your SIRIUS subscription after
connection
1
Activate your XM subscription after
connection
• Only Channel 0, 1, and 247 are available before
activation.
2
1
SIRIUS Satellite radio starts updating all the SIRIUS
channels.
2
Once completed, SIRIUS Satellite radio tunes in to
the preset channel, CH184.
XMDirect™ Tuner Box or XMDirect2 Tuner System
starts updating all the XM channels. “Channel 1” is
tuned in automatically.
3
4
Check your SIRIUS ID, see page 24.
Contact SIRIUS on the internet at
3
4
Check your XM Satellite radio ID labelled
on the casing of the XMDirect™ Tuner Box
or XMDirect2 Tuner System, or tune in to
“Channel 0” (see page 17).
<http://activate.siriusradio.com/> to
activate your subscription, or you can call
SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).
“SUB UPDT PRESS ANY KEY” scrolls on the display
once subscription has been completed.
Contact XM Satellite radio on the internet
at <http://xmradio.com/activation/> to
activate your subscription, or you can call
1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).
Once completed, the unit tunes in to one of the
available channels (Channel 4 or higher).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select “SIRIUS” or “XM.”
1
2
Select a category.
SIRIUS: If you select “ALL,” you can tune in to all the channels of all categories.
Select a channel to listen.
3
• Holding the button changes the channels rapidly.
• While searching, invalid and unsubscribed channels are skipped.
XM: If you do not select a channel within 15 seconds, category selected in step 2
is canceled. You can select all channels of all categories now (including non-
categorised channels).
Checking the XM Satellite radio ID
While selecting “XM,” select “Channel 0.”
Storing channels in memory
You can preset up to 18 channels for both SIRIUS and
XM.
Ex.: Storing channel into preset number “04.”
1
Tune in to a channel you want to store (see
steps 1 – 3 above).
The display alternately shows “RADIO ID” and the
8-digit (alphanumeric) ID number.
2
Select preset number “04.”
To cancel the ID number display, select any channel
other than “Channel 0.”
Selecting SIRIUS/XM preset station
3
[Turn] = [Press]
EXTERNAL DEVICES 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the iPod
Before operating, connect the Interface adapter for iPod, KS-PD100 (separately purchased) to the CD changer
jack on the rear of the unit.
Preparation: Make sure “CH / IPOD” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 26.
Select “IPOD.”
1
2
Select a song.
Playback starts automatically.
Selecting a track from the menu
Selecting the playback modes
1
2
Enter the main menu.
1
2
This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about 5 seconds.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select the desired menu.
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
PLAYLISTS Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSERS Ô (back
to the beginning)
REPEAT
ONE RPT
:
:
Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod.
3
Confirm the selection.
ALL RPT
Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod.
RANDOM
• To return to the previous menu, press 5.
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
ALBUM RND*
:
:
Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
SONG RND
Functions the same as “Shuffle
Songs” of the iPod.
Pause playback
• To resume playback, press the button
again.
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
[Press] Select tracks
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of the
main “MENU.”
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the other external components
You can connect an external component to:
• CD changer jack on the rear of this unit using the following adapters:
–Line Input Adapter, KS-U57 (separately purchsed)
–AUX Input Adapter, KS-U58 (separately purchsed)
Preparation: Make sure “EXT INPUT” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 26.
• AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 26.
Select “EXT INPUT” or “AUX IN.”
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
Adjust the volume.
—
2
3
Adjust the sound as you want (see pages 20 and 21).
—
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack
Portable audio player, etc.
3.5 mm (3/16”) stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
EXTERNAL DEVICES 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
• See also page 23 (“EQ”).
Selecting from Menu.
or
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ”
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset value
Sound
BASS
MIDDLE
Freq. Level
TREBLE
LOUD
mode
(loudness)
Freq. Level
Q
Q
Freq. Level
Q
USER
60 Hz
100 Hz
80 Hz
00 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+01 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+02 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+04 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
00 Q1.0 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
+01 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
–02 Q1.0 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25
ROCK
+02 Q1.25
+03 Q1.25
+02 Q1.25
+01 Q1.25
+03 Q1.25
CLASSIC
POPS
OFF
100 Hz
60 Hz
HIP HOP
JAZZ
80 Hz
Freq.: Frequency Q: Q-slope
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Select a tone.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
• When HD Radio tuner box is connected, this feature
will be disable.
[Turn] = [Press]
1
Select “FM” or “AM.”
Adjust the sound elements of the selected
tone.
2
Show the title entry screen.
[Turn] = [Press]
1
2
3
Adjust the frequency.
Adjust the level.
Adjust the Q-slope.
Range/selectable items
BASS MIDDLE TREBLE
Sound
elements
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character.
Frequency
60 Hz
80 Hz
500 Hz 7.5 kHz
1.0 kHz 10.0 kHz
100 Hz 1.5 kHz 12.5 kHz
120 Hz 2.5 kHz 15.0 kHz
Level
Q
–06 to –06 to –06 to
+06
+06
+06
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
Q0.5
Q1.0
Q1.5
Q2.0
Q0.75
Q1.0
Q1.25
Q1.5
Q0.75
Q1.25
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering the title.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other sound
characteristics.
The adjustment made will be stored automatically.
4
Finish the procedure.
To erase the entire title
In step 2 above...
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnIlNoaGd.S 21
Bluetooth settings
You can change the settings listed on the right column
according to your preference.
Setting menu ( : Initial)
AUTO CNNCT (connect)
When the unit is turned on, the connection is
established automatically with...
1
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
Enter the Bluetooth menu.
OFF:
No Bluetooth device.
2
LAST: The last connected Bluetooth device.
ORDER: The available registered Bluetooth device
found at first.
AUTO ANSWER
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
3
4
Select “SETTINGS.”
ON:
The unit answers the incoming calls
automatically.
OFF:
The unit does not answer the calls
automatically. Answer the calls manually.
Select a setting item.
REJECT: The unit rejects all incoming calls.
MSG INFO (message info)
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
AUTOMATIC: The unit informs you of the arrival of
a message by ringing and displaying
“RCV MESSAGE” (receiving message).
• The display illuminate in blue (see
“RING COLOR” on page 24).
1
*
*
Appears only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected.
Appears only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected and it is compatible with text message
(notified through JVC Bluetooth adapter).
Bluetooth Audio: Shows only “Version.”
2
3
MANUAL: The unit does not inform you of the
arrival of a message.
*
MIC SETTING (microphone setting)
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth
adapter, [LEVEL 01/02/03].
5
Change the setting accordingly.
VERSION
The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are
shown.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].
Cancels.
demonstration • DEMO OFF
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON
Clock display
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].
[Initial: 1:00]
CLOCK ADJ*2
Clock adjustment
• AUTO
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the clock
data provided via the satellite radio channel.
Cancels.
• OFF
:
TIME ZONE*2, *3
:
Select your residential area from one of the time zones for clock adjustment.
Time zone
EASTERN, ATLANTIC, NEWFOUND, ALASKA, PACIFIC, MOUNTAIN, CENTRAL
DST*2, *3
Daylight savings
time
• DST ON
:
Activates daylight savings time if your residential area is
subject to DST.
Cancels.
• DST OFF
:
EQ
Equalizer
:
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*4
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio is connected.
Displayed only when “CLOCK ADJ” is set to “AUTO.”
2
3
4
*
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnIloNaGd.S 23
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
TAG DISPLAY
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
AREA
Tuner channel
interval
• AREA US
• AREA EU
• AREA SA
:
:
:
When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals
are set to 10 kHz/200 kHz.
When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to
9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).
When using in South American countries where FM interval is
100 kHz. AM interval is set to 10 kHz.
MONO*5
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
• MONO OFF
:
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo
effect will be lost, [8].
Restore the stereo effect.
SID*6
SIRIUS ID
:
Your SIRIUS identification number scrolls on the display 5 seconds after “SID” is
selected, [16].
If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the unit return to playback mode.
BLEND HOLD*7 • AUTO
HD Radio • DIGITAL
reception mode • ANALOG
:
:
:
Switch between digital and analog audio automatically, [14].
Tuning to digital audio only.
Tuning to analog audio only.
IF BAND
Intermediate
frequency band • WIDE
• AUTO
:
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
:
COLOR 01
– COLOR 29,
USER
:
Select one of the preset or user color for display and button (except EQ/
/0) illumination.
(See also page 26 for USER color setting.)
MENU COLOR
Menu color
• OFF
• ON
:
:
Cancels.
Changes the display and button (except EQ/
/0)
illumination during menu, list search and playback mode
operations.
RING COLOR*8 • OFF
Ring color • ON
:
:
Cancels.
When a call comes in, the display will flash in blue.
• The display will change to the original color when the call is
answered or the incoming call stops.
When the unit receive a text message, the display only
illuminate in blue.
5
6
7
8
*
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM” or “HD Radio.”
Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio is connected.
Displayed only when HD Radio tuner box is connected.
Displayed only when Bluetooth adapter, KS-BTA200 is connected.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
FADER*9
Fader
R06 – F06
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
BALANCE*10
Balance
L06 – R06
:
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.
VOL ADJUST
Volume adjust
VOL ADJ –05 —
VOL ADJ +05
:
Preset the volume adjustment level of each source (except
FM), compared to the FM volume level. The volume level
[Initial: VOL ADJ 00] will automatically increase or decrease when you change
the source.
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you
want to adjust.
• “VOL ADJ FIX” appears on the display if “FM” is selected
as the source.
L/O MODE
Line output mode
• SUB.W
• REAR
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for
connecting a subwoofer (through an external amplifier).
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for
connecting the speakers (through an external amplifier).
SUB.W FREQ*11 • LOW
Subwoofer cutoff • MID
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 72 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 111 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 157 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
frequency
• HIGH
SUB.W LEVEL*11 SUB.W 00 — SUB.
Subwoofer level W 08
:
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
[Initial: SUB.W 04]
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*12
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
9
*
*
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
10 This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.
11
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
12
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnIloNaGd.S 25
Category Menu items
Selectable setting, [reference page]
AM*13
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].
15
EXT IN*14,
*
• CH / IPOD
• EXT INPUT
:
:
To use a JVC CD changer, [15], or an Apple iPod, [18].
To connect portable audio player to the CD changer jack,
[19].
External input
AUX IN*16
Auxiliary input
• AUX OFF
• AUX ON
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].
13
14
15
16
*
*
*
*
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, Bluetooth, HD Radio, or AUX IN.
Not required for HD Radio broadcast/SIRIUS/XM tuners and Bluetooth.
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
Color settings
Creating your own color
—USER Color
You can create your own colors—“DAY COLOR” or
“NIGHT COLOR.”
DAY COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER OFF.”
NIGHT COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER ON.”
5
6
Select a primary color.
[Turn] = [Press]
Adjust the level (00 to 31) of the selected
primary color.
1
[Turn] = [Press]
2
3
4
Select “COLOR” = “USER.”
[Turn] = [Press]
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust other primary
colors.
Exit from the setting.
While “USER” is shown on the display...
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
26 SDEoTwTnIlNoaGdSfrom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More about this unit
Basic operations
Disc operations
Turning on the power
Caution for DualDisc playback
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
General
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA
formats.
General
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as
those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD
(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
Bluetooth operations
General
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on the
circumstances around you.
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• ERROR CNNCT (Error Connection):
The device is registered but the connection has failed.
Use “CONNECT” to connect the device again. (See
page 12.)
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• ERROR
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
Try the operation again. If “ERROR” appears again,
check if the device supports the function you have
tried.
• UNFOUND
No available Bluetooth device is detected by
“SEARCH.”
• LOADING
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
The unit is updating the phone book*.
* Displays only when your cellular phone is equipped
with these functions and is compatible with this unit.
• PLEASE WAIT
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• If the text information includes more than 11
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can
display up to 40 characters.
The unit is preparing to use the Bluetooth function. If
the message does not disappear, turn off and turn on
the unit, then connect the device again (or reset the
unit).
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc.
co.jp/english/car/> (English website only)
• RESET 8
Check the connection between the adapter and this
unit.
Satellite radio
Title assignment
• To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or to sign
up, visit <http://www.sirius.com>.
• For the latest channel listings and programming
information, or to sign up for XM Satellite radio, visit
<http://www.xmradio.com>.
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
Menu operations
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
iPod
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod nano*1
– iPod video (5th Generation)*2
– iPod classic 2007*2
– iPod nano (3rd Generation)*2
1
*
When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu.
2
*
REFERENCES 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 26).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 26).
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit. The unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio device at a time.
While connecting a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected
device and search again.
• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select “OPEN” on the unit to connect
the device. (See page 11.)
• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device.
• Select the device name from “SPECIAL,” then try to
connect again. (See page 11.)
• Try to pair/connect from the Bluetooth device.
• Echo or noise occurs.
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Phone sound quality is poor.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the
Bluetooth cellular phone.
• Move the car to a place where you can get a better
signal reception.
* For Bluetooth operations, refer also to the instructions supplied with the Bluetooth Adapter.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• The sound is interrupted or skipped during • Reduce the distance between the unit and the
playback of a Bluetooth audio device.
Bluetooth audio device.
• Disconnect the device connected for “BT-PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the
device again.
• The connected audio device cannot be
controlled.
Check whether the connected audio device supports
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
• Sound quality changes when receiving
HD Radio stations.
Fix the reception mode either to “DIGITAL” or “ANALOG”
(see pages 14 and 24).
• No sound can be heard.
• “ANALOG” is selected when receiving all digital
broadcast of HD Radio station. Select “DIGITAL” or
“AUTO” (see pages 14 and 24).
• “DIGITAL” is selected when receiving weak digital
signals or receiving conventional radio broadcast.
Select “ANALOG” or “AUTO” (see pages 14
and 24).
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Reconnect this unit and the HD Radio tuner box correctly,
then reset the unit.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “NO MAGAZINE” appears on the display.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• “CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE”
scrolls on the display while listening to the
SIRIUS Satellite radio.
Starts subscribing to SIRIUS Satellite radio (see page 16).
• No sound can be heard. “UPDATING”
appears on the display.
The unit is updating the channel information and it takes
a few minutes to complete.
• “NO SIGNAL” appears on the display.
Move to an area where signals are stronger.
• “NO ANTENNA” or “ANTENNA”appears on Connect the antenna firmly.
the display.
• “NO CHANNEL” appears on the display
for about 5 seconds, then returns to the
previous display while listening to the
SIRIUS Satellite radio.
No broadcast on the selected channel.
Select another channel or continue listening to the
previous channel.
• “NO (information)*” scrolls on the display No text information for the selected channel.
while listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.
• “---” appears on the display while listening
to the XM Satellite radio.
• “---” appears on the display for about
2 seconds, then returns to the previous
Selected channel is no longer available or is
unauthorized.
channel while listening to the XM Satellite Select another channel or continue listening to the
radio.
previous channel.
• “OFF AIR” appears on the display while
listening to the XM Satellite radio.
Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time.
Select another channel or continue listening to the
previous channel.
• “LOADING” appears on the display while
listening to the XM Satellite radio.
The unit is loading the channel information and audio.
Text information are temporarily unavailable.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
• Satellite radio does not work at all.
Reconnect this unit and the satellite radio correctly and
reset this unit.
* NO CATEGORY, NO ARTIST, NO COMPOSER, and NO SONG/PROGRAM.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work. • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
• The sound is distorted.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
• “NO IPOD” appears on the display.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Charge the battery.
• Playback stops.
The headphones are disconnected during playback.
Restart the playback operation (see page 18).
• No sound can be heard when connecting
an iPod nano.
• Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod.
Then, connect it again.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Victor
Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
• HD Radio™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
• “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo are registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
• XM and its corresponding logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
• “SAT Radio,” the SAT Radio logo and all related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc., and XM
Satellite Radio, Inc.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD
—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
REFERENCES 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Power Output:
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4 Ω
and ≤ 1% THD+N
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Load Impedance:
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz)
Q0.5, Q1.0, Q1.5, Q2.0
Middle:
Treble:
12 dB (500 Hz, 1.0 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz)
Q0.75, Q1.0, Q1.25, Q1.5
12 dB (7.5 kHz, 10.0 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
15.0 kHz)
Q0.75, Q1.25
Frequency Response:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
KD-A305:
KD-R300:
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
5.0 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
KD-A305:
KD-R300:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, CD changer jack,
Steering wheel remote input (only for
KD-A305), Antenna input
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM: with channel interval set to 100 kHz 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
or 200 kHz
with channel interval set to 50 kHz 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
AM: with channel interval set to 10 kHz 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
with channel interval set to 9 kHz 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
35 dB
AM Tuner
Sensitivity:
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
96 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Grounding System:
Negative ground
Allowable Operating Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 6-5/16”)
Panel Size:
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
(7-7/16” × 2-5/16” × 1/4”)
Mass:
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) (excluding accessories)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.
REFERENCES 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Still having trouble??
USA ONLY
Call 1-800-252-5722
http://www.jvc.com
We can help you!
EN, SP, FR
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0808DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-A305/KD-R300
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual de instalación/conexión
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, SP, FR
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0570-002A
[J]
ENGLISH
ESPAÑOL
FRANÇAIS
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser
Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con
sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant
continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce
type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous
pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
dealers.
adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para
automóviles.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before
installing the unit.
ADVERTENCIAS
AVERTISSEMENTS
Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher
negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas
antes de instalar la unidad.
la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements
électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.
• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis
del automóvil después de la instalación.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de
cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.
Notes:
Notas:
Remarques:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el
fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario
de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.
• Se recomienda conectar altavoces que tengan una potencia máxima
de más de 50 W (tanto en las partes delantera como trasera, con una
impedancia de 4 Ω á 8 Ω). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50
W, cambie “AMP GAIN” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte
la página 25 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los terminales de los conductores
NO UTILIZADOS con cinta aislante.
• El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese
de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute
souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance
maximum de plus de 50 W (à l’arrière et à l’avant et avec une
impédance de 4 Ω à 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à
50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes
(voir page 25 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• Pour éviter les courts-circuits, recouvrez les extrémités des fils
INUTILISÉS avec une bande isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire
attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being
damaged (see page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.
Heat sink / Sumidero térmico / Dissipateur de chaleur
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker
connections:
PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la
fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces:
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la
connexion des enceintes:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon
d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait
sérieusement endommagé.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation
aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían
producirse graves daños en la unidad.
• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del
cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su
automóvil.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún
consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.
Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et
raccordement
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose
elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de
JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.
manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.
A
B
C
Control panel
Panel de control
Panneau de commande
Sleeve
Cubierta
Manchon
Trim plate
Placa de guarnición
Plaque d’assemblage
D
E
F
G
Power cord
Cordón de alimentación
Cordon d’alimentation
Washer (ø5)
Arandela (ø5)
Rondelle (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Tuerca de seguridad (M5)
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)
Mounting bolt—M4 × 5 mm (M4 × 1/4");
M5 × 12.5 mm (M5 × 1/2")
Perno de montaje—M4 × 5 mm (M4 × 1/4 pulgada);
M5 × 12,5 mm (M5 × 1/2 pulgada)
Boulon de montage—M4 × 5 mm (M4 × 1/4 pouces);
M5 × 12,5 mm (M5 × 1/2 pouces)
H
I
J
K
Rubber cushion
Cojín de goma
Amortisseur en caoutchouc
Handles
Manijas
Poignées
Remote controller
Control remoto
Télécommande
Battery
Pila
Pile
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL
TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS)
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE
DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna
questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult
your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si
vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits
pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para
instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas. compagnie d’approvisionnement.
by a qualified technician.
• Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad,
hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado.
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le
faire installer par un technicien qualifié.
Do the required electrical connections.
Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.
Réalisez les connexions électriques.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para
retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.
Tordez les languettes appropriées pour
maintenir le manchon en place.
Removing the unit
Extracción de la unidad
Retrait de l’appareil
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera.
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,
extráigalas de la manera indicada en
la ilustración para poder desmontar la
unidad.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la
façon illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.
When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un
soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar
la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
option
Stay (option)
Soporte (opción)
En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.
Hauban (en option)
Fire wall
Flat head screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*2
Tabique a prueba de incendios
Cloison
Tornillos de cabeza plana—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2
Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2
Dashboard
Tablero de
instrumentos
Bracket*2
Ménsula*2
Support*2
Tableau de bord
Screw (option)
Flat head screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*2
Tornillo (opción)
Vis (en option)
Tornillos de cabeza plana—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2
Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2
Pocket
Compartimiento
Poche
Bracket*2
Ménsula*2
Support*2
Note
Nota
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8") -long screws. If longer
screws are used, they could damage the unit.
: Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de
longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de
30˚.
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm
(3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.
1
2
1
1
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on
*
*
Al poner la unidad vertical, tenga cuidado de no dañar el fusible
provisto en la parte posterior.
No suministrado con esta unidad.
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne
pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.
Non fourni avec cet appareil.
the rear.
2
2
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
TROUBLESHOOTING
LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES
• The fuse blows.
• El fusible se quema.
• Le fusible saute.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?
• No es posible conectar la alimentación.
* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?
• No sale sonido de los altavoces.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?
• El sonido presenta distorsión.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una
masa común?
• Perturbación de ruido.
* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Le son est déformé.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
à la masse?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Interférence avec les sons.
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la
voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
• Esta unidad se calienta.
• Cet appareil devient chaud.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una
masa común?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
à la masse?
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?
• Esta unidad no funciona en absoluto.
* ¿Reinicializó la unidad?
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
ESPAÑOL
FRANÇAIS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
A Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le
câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager
sérieusement l’appareil.
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de
la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del
vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car unidad.
body may be different in color.
Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector
procedentes de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes
en color.
1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order
1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el
spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
specified in the illustration below.
orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.
2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
2 Conecte el cable de antena.
3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.
Rear ground terminal
Terminal de tierra posterior
Borne arrière de masse
Rear line out (see diagram
)
Salida de línea trasera (véase diagrama
)
Sortie de ligne arrière (voir le diagramme
)
15 A fuse
Fusible de 15 A
Fusible 15 A
Antenna terminal
To external components (see diagram
A los componentes externos (véase diagrama
Aux appareils extérieurs (voir le diagramme
)
Terminal de la antena
)
Borne de l’antenne
)
Steering wheel remote input (see
diagram )—only for KD-A305
Entrada del control remoto del
volante de dirección (véase
diagrama ) —sólo para KD-A305
Entrée de la télécommande
de volant (voir le diagramme
)—seulement pour le KD-A305
Black / Negro /
Ignition switch
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Noir
Interruptor de encendido
Interrupteur d’allumage
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del
automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture
(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
Yellow*2 / Amarillo*2
Jaune*2
/
Red / Rojo /
Rouge
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Fuse block / Bloque de
fusibles / Porte-fusible
Blue with white stripe /
Azul con rayas blancas /
Bleu avec bande blanche
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
(200 mA max.)
White with black stripe
Blanco con rayas negras
Blanc avec bande noire
White
Blanco
Blanc
Gray with black stripe
Gray
Gris
Gris
Green with black stripe
Verde con rayas negras
Vert avec bande noire
Green
Verde
Vert
Purple with black stripe
Púrpura con rayas negras
Violet avec bande noire
Purple
Púrpura
Violet
Gris con rayas negras
Gris avec bande noire
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
Altavoz derecho (trasero)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)
Altavoz derecho (frontal)
Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Enceinte droit (avant)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
B
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / Conexión de los amplificadores o subwoofer externos / Connexion d’amplificateurs
extérieurs ou d’un caisson de grave
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système
autoradio.
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through
this unit.
Usted podrá conectar un amplificador para mejorar el sistema estéreo
de su automóvil.
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)
au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il
puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
•
Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor
remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta unidad.
• For amplifier only:
• Sólo para el amplificador:
– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to
the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
– For KD-A305: The line output level of this unit is kept high to
maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down
the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best
performance from this unit.
• Pour l’amplificateur seulement:
– Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al
amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad
quedan sin usar.
– Para KD-A305: El nivel de salida de línea de esta unidad permanece
alto para que corresponda con los sonidos de alta fidelidad
reproducidos por esta unidad.
Cuando conecte un amplificador externo a esta unidad, disminuya
el control de ganancia del amplificador externo para obtener un
óptimo rendimiento de esta unidad.
– Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-
les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet
appareil inutilisés.
– Pour le KD-A305: Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est
maintenu à un niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité Hi-Fi
pour les sons reproduits par cet appareil.
Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à cet appareil,
diminuez le réglage du gain sur l’amplificateur extérieur pour
obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)
Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “REAR” (Consulte la página 25 del MANUAL
DE INSTRUCCIONES.)
Cable remoto (azul con rayas blancas)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)
Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “REAR” (Voir page 25 du MANUEL
To the remote lead of other
equipment or automatic antenna
if any
Al conductor remoto de
otro equipo o de la antena
automática, si hubiere
D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
Rear speakers
Altavoces posteriores
Enceintes arrière
Au fil de télécommande de
l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne
automatique s’il y en a une
Signal cord*1
Cable de señal*1
Cordon de signal*1
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)
Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “SUB.W” (Consulte la página 25 del MANUAL
DE INSTRUCCIONES.)
Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “SUB.W” (Voir page 25 du MANUEL
D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
Front speakers
Altavoces delanteros
Enceintes avant
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Caisson de grave
or / o / ou
1
2
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
No suministrado con esta unidad.
*
*
Non fourni avec cet appareil.
2
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead
must be connected; otherwise, the power cannot be turned on.
Remote lead
Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa a de la
instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo contrario no se podrá
conectar la alimentación.
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil
doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.
Fil d’alimentation à distance
3
4
3
4
*
*
*
*
3
4
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of
the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage
to the unit.
*
*
Cable remoto
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la
voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert
de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a un
lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela antes de
fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían producir daños en la unidad.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller (only for KD-A305) / Conexión al control remoto del volante de dirección (sólo para
KD-A305) / Connexion de la télécommande de volant (seulement pour le KD-A305)
C
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,
Si votre voiture est équipée d’une télécommande de volant, vous
pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant cette télécommande.
Pour la connexion, vous avez besoin d’un adaptateur de
télécommande spécialisé (non fourni) correspondant à votre voiture.
Pour en savoir plus, consultez le revendeur autoradio où vous avez
acheté votre autoradio.
Si su automóvil está equipado con control remoto en el volante de
dirección, podrá controlar este receptor utilizando el control remoto.
Para la conexión, se requiere un adaptador remoto exclusivo (no
suministrado) que sea adecuado para su automóvil. Para los detalles,
consulte con el concesionario car audio donde compró el receptor.
you can operate this unit using the controller. For connection, an
exclusive remote adapter (not supplied) which matches your car is
required. For details, consult the same car audio dealer as where the
unit is purchased.
Remote adapter (not supplied for this unit)
Adaptador para remoto exclusivo (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Adaptateur pour télécommande spécialisé (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Steering wheel remote input
Entrada del control remoto del volante de dirección
Entrée de la télécommande de volant
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Control remoto del volante de dirección (equipado en el vehículo)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)
Connecting the external components / Conexión de los componentes externos / Connexion des appareils extérieurs
D
When connecting the external components, refer also to the
manuals supplied for the components and adapter.
Lors de la connexion des appareils extérieurs, référez-vous aussi aux
manuels fournis avec les appareils et les adaptateurs.
Cuando conecte componentes externos, consulte, también, los
manuales suministrados con los componentes y el adaptador.
CAUTION:
PRECAUTION:
PRECAUCION:
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the
unit is turned off.
Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs, assurez-vous que
l’appareil est hors tension.
Antes de conectar los componentes externos, asegúrese de que la
unidad esté apagada.
You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer
jack.
Vous pouvez connecter les appareils JVC suivants à la prise de
changeur de CD.
Puede conectar los siguientes componentes JVC al jack del cambiador
de CD.
Nom du
Nombre del
Appareil JVC
modèle
JVC component
Model name
Componente JVC
modelo
Changeur de CD (CD-CH)
Tuner HD Radio
CH-X1500, etc.
KT-HD300
CD changer (CD-CH)
HD Radio tuner box
CH-X1500, etc.
KT-HD300
Cambiador de CD (CD-CH)
CH-X1500, etc.
KT-HD300
TM
TM
TM
Sintonizador HD Radio
Vous pouvez aussi connecter les appareils suivants en utilisant divers
adaptateurs JVC ou systèmes.
You can also connect the following components through the various También puede conectar los siguientes componentes a través de los
JVC adapters or system.
diversos adaptadores o sistema JVC.
• Vous pouvez avoir besoin d’acheter certains cordons de connexion
séparément.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
• Puede ser necesario comprar los cables de conexión por separado.
Nombre del
modelo
Component
Adapter/System
Model name
Componente
Adaptador/Sistema
Adaptateur/
Système
Nom du
modèle
Appareil
Bluetooth device
iPod
Bluetooth adapter
Interface adapter for KS-PD100
iPod
KS-BTA200
Dispositivo Bluetooth
iPod
Adaptador Bluetooth
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
Périphérique Bluetooth Adaptateur Bluetooth KS-BTA200
Adaptador de interfaz
para iPod
iPod
Adaptateur d’interface KS-PD100
pour iPod
TM
TM
XMDirect Tuner Box Smart Digital Adapter XMDJVC100
XMDirect Tuner Box
Adaptador digital
inteligente
XMDJVC100
TM
XMDirect Tuner Box Adaptateur numérique XMDJVC100
intelligent
XMDirect2 Tuner
System
XM satellite radio
System
CNP2000UC and
CNPJVC1
Sistema de sintonizador Sistema de radio XM
XMDirect2 Satellite
CNP2000UC y
CNPJVC1
XMDirect2 Tuner
System
Système radio satellite CNP2000UC et
XM CNPJVC1
SIRIUS satellite radio SIRIUS satellite radio SC-C1 and
System KS-SRA100
SIRIUS satellite radio SIRIUS satellite radio PnP, SC-VDOC1
Radio por satélite SIRIUS Sistema de radio
satelital SIRIUS
SC-C1 y
KS-SRA100
Radio satellite SIRIUS Système radio satellite SC-C1 et
SIRIUS KS-SRA100
Radio satellite SIRIUS Système radio satellite PnP, SC-VDOC1
System
and KS-SRA100
Radio por satélite SIRIUS Sistema de radio
satelital SIRIUS
PnP, SC-VDOC1
y KS-SRA100
Portable audio player Line input adapter
with line output jacks
KS-U57
SIRIUS
et KS-SRA100
Reproductor de audio
portátil con jacks de
salida de línea
Adaptador de entrada
por línea
KS-U57
Lecteur audio portable Adaptateur d’entrée
avec prises de sortie de de ligne
ligne
KS-U57
Portable audio player AUX input adapter
with 3.5 mm (3/16")
KS-U58
Reproductor de audio
portátil con jack mini
estéreo de 3,5 mm
(3/16 pulgada)
Adaptador de entrada
AUX
KS-U58
Lecteur audio portable Adaptateur d’entrée
KS-U58
stereo mini jack
avec mini fiche stéréo
auxiliaire
de 3,5 mm (3/16 pouces)
When connecting more than one component (maximum: three),
it is recommended that you connect the components in series as
explained below.
Cuando conecte más de un componente (máximo: tres), se
recomienda que conecte los componentes en serie, como se explica a
continuación.
Lors de la connexion de plus d’un appareil (maximum: trois), il est
recommandé que vous connectiez les appareils en série comme nous
l’expliquons ci-dessous.
• La radio XM et SIRIUS ne peuvent pas être utilisées en même
temps.
• XM Radio and SIRIUS satellite radio cannot be used together.
• No puede utilizar juntas la radio XM y la radio satelital SIRIUS.
When connecting two components in series /
Cuando conecta dos componentes en serie /
Lors de la connexion de deux appareils en série
When connecting three components in series / Cuando conecta tres componentes en
serie / Lors de la connexion de trois appareils en série
5
*
5
*
CD changer jack / Jack para el cambiador
de CD / Prise du changeur CD
CD changer jack / Jack para el cambiador
de CD / Prise du changeur CD
A
B
KT-HD300*6 / KS-SRA100*6, *7 / XMDJVC100 /
CNP2000UC*8
KS-BTA200
A
KT-HD300*6 / KS-SRA100*6, *7 / KS-BTA200 / XMDJVC100 / CNP2000UC*8
B*5 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58
C*5 KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58
It is not recommended to connect KS-U57/KS-U58 at C in series with XMDJVC100, CNP2000UC and KS-BTA200.
No se recomienda conectar el KS-U57/KSU58 en C, en serie con XMDJVC100, CNP2000UC y KS-BTA200.
Il n’est pas recommandé de connecter le KS-U57/KS-U58 en série à C in avec le XMDJVC100, CNP2000UC et le KS-
BTA200.
To disconnect the connector / Para desconectar el cable / Pour déconnecter le
connecteur
Hold the connector top tightly (1), then pull it out (2) .
Sujete firmemente la parte superior del conector (1) y
seguidamente, extráigalo (2) .
Tenez fermement le connecteur par-dessus (1) et tirez
vers l’extérieur (2).
TM
TM
TM
• HD Radio is a proprietary trademark of iBiquity Digital Corp.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
• HD Radio es una marca comercial de iBiquity Digital Corp.
• iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Inc., registrada en los
EE.UU. y otros países.
• HD Radio est une marque de commerce d’iBiquity Digital Corp.
• iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Inc., enregistrée aux
États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
5
5
5
*
To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see
page 26 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
Power cannot be supplied to the component through the CD changer
jack. You need to connect the power cord supplied for the component
separately.
This model is a component of SIRIUS satellite radio System.
This model is a component of XM satellite radio System.
*
*
Para utilizar estos componentes, configure el ajuste de entrada externa
correctamente (consulte la página 26 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
No puede suministrar energía eléctrica al componente a través del
jack del cambiador de CD. Es necesario conectar, aparte, el cable de
alimentación suministrado con el componente.
Este modelo es un componente del sistema de radio satelital SIRIUS.
Este modelo es un componente del sistema de radio XM Satellite.
*
*
Pour utiliser ces appareils, réglez l’entrée extérieure correctement (voir
page 26 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
L’alimentation ne peut pas être fournie à l’appareil par la prise
de changeur de CD. Vous devez connecter séparément le cordon
d’alimentation fourni pour l’appareil.
Ce modèle est un composant du système radio satellite SIRIUS.
Ce modèle est un composant du système radio satellite XM.
6
6
6
*
7
7
8
7
8
*
*
*
*
*
*
8
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD RECEIVER
KD-R404
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0572-001A
[UI]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
[European Union only]
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to
avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of
the output level.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to reset your unit
CONTENTS
OPERATIONS
Basic operations...........................................
• Using the control panel...............................
• Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)......
Preparation..................................................
Listening to the radio...................................
Disc operations.............................................
4
4
5
7
8
9
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased (except the
registered Bluetooth device, see page 10).
EXTERNAL DEVICES
How to forcibly eject a disc
Using the Bluetooth® devices....................... 10
• Using the Bluetooth cellular phone ............ 12
• Using the Bluetooth audio player ............... 13
Listening to the CD changer ......................... 14
Listening to the iPod.................................... 15
Listening to the other external
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
components.............................................. 16
Detaching the control panel
Attaching the control panel
SETTINGS
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 17
Title assignment .......................................... 18
Bluetooth settings ....................................... 19
Menu operations.......................................... 20
Color settings............................................... 23
REFERENCES
More about this unit .................................... 24
Troubleshooting........................................... 27
Maintenance................................................ 31
Specifications............................................... 32
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operations
Using the control panel
1
• FM/AM: Select preset station.
• CD/CD-CH: Select folder.
• IPOD: Enter the main menu/Pause playback/
Confirm selection.
• BT-PHONE/BT-AUDIO: Enter/go back to
previous Bluetooth menu.
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).
• Turn off the power [Hold].
Select the source.
FM = AM*1 = CD*2 = CD-CH*2/IPOD*2 (or
EXT INPUT) = BT-PHONE*2 = BT-AUDIO*2 =
AUX IN*1 = (back to the beginning)
• Enter list operations.
8
9
p
q
w
Eject disc.
Select the sound mode.
Detach the panel.
Change the display information.
• FM/AM: Search for station.
• CD/CD-CH: Select track.
• IPOD: Select track.
• BT-PHONE/BT-AUDIO: Select setting item/
registered device.
2
3
e
r
t
Return to the previous menu.
Remote sensor
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
4
5
1
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 22).
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready
or not connected.
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*3
• Confirm the selection [Press].*3
• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*3
• CD/CD-CH/IPOD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*3
Loading slot
2
*
3
*
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.
6
7
Display window
You can change the display and button illumination (see “COLOR” on page 21).
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display window
1
2
3
Bluetooth indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Status of Bluetooth device
(Device number, [P: 1 – 5]; signal strength,
6
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,
ROCK, POPS, USER
EQ (equalizer) indicator
7
8
9
LOUD (loudness) indicator
[
: 0 – 3]*; battery reminder, [ : 0 – 3]*)
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
Main display
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),
MO (monaural)
* As the number increases, the signal/battery power
becomes stronger.
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Time countdown indicator
p
q
4
5
Playback source indicators—CH (CD changer), DISC
w
Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Caution:
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire, or the like.
Remote sensor
If the effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace the battery.
Continued on the next page
OPERATIONS
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
7
For Bluetooth cellular phone:
– Answers calls if pressed briefly.
– Rejects calls if pressed and held.
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
• Reverse skip/forward skip for Bluetooth audio.
1
2
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
• Changes the preset stations.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.
• While playing an MP3 disc on an
MP3-compatible CD changer:
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.
• While listening to an Apple iPod:
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such
as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long
time.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot
reach.
• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,
or dispose of it in a fire.
• Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
3
4
5
Adjusts the volume level.
Selects the sound mode.
Selects the source.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
Cancel the display demonstration and set the clock
• See also page 20.
Turn on the power.
1
Cancel the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2
Set the clock
Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust
the minute.
[Turn] = [Press]
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
When the power is turned off: Check the current clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to
“CLOCK OFF,” (see page 20)
When the power is turned on: Change the display information of the current source
FM/AM
Station name*1 = Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)
CD/CD-CH
Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*2 = Track title*2 = Current track number with the
elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time = (back
to the beginning)
MP3/WMA:
Album name/performer (folder name)*3 = Track title (file name)*3 =
Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
IPOD
Folder name = Track name = Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current
track number with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
1
*
*
*
If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 18.
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 20),
folder name and file name appear.
2
3
OPERATIONS
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the radio
Select “FM” or “AM.”
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,
then press it repeatedly.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”
lights up on the display.
When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
• See also page 21.
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
1
While listening to a station...
[Turn] = [Press]
2
Select the preset number range you want to
store.
Select “TUNER” = “MONO”
= “MONO ON”
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• “MO” lights up on the display.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator
goes off.
3
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically.
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations
3
for AM.
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset
number “04.”
Selecting preset station
1
or
2
Select preset number “04.”
[Turn] = [Press]
Disc operations
Turn on the power.
Insert a disc.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change
the source or eject the disc.
1
2
Stop playing and ejecting the disc
Selecting a track/folder
• “NO DISC” appears.
Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Prohibiting disc ejection
[Turn] = [Press]
• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder, then
the desired track by performing the control dial.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
Continued on the next page
OPERATIONS
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you
to...
Using the Bluetooth®
devices
MP3/WMA: Select folder
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect
the Bluetooth adapter (KS-BTA200) (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this
unit.
[Press]Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to check
the countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
To use a Bluetooth device through the unit
(“BT-PHONE” and “BT-AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
2
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
[Turn] = [Press]
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“BT-PHONE” and “BT-AUDIO”).
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Registering a Bluetooth device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Use either of the following items in the Bluetooth menu
to register and establish the connection with a device.
• Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO” as the source to
operate the Bluetooth menu.
REPEAT
TRACK RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
FOLDER RPT
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder
RANDOM
OPEN
Make the unit ready to establish a new
Bluetooth connection.
FOLDER RND
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all
tracks of current folder, then tracks
of next folders
Connection is established by operating the
Bluetooth device.
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
SEARCH Make the unit ready to establish a new
Bluetooth connection.
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Connection is established by operating
the unit.
10 OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering using “OPEN”
Preparation: Operate the device to turn on its
5
Use the Bluetooth device to search and
connect.
On the device to be connected, enter the same
PIN code you have just entered for this unit.
“CONNECTED” appears on the display.
Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.
Bluetooth function.
1
2
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
Select “NEW DEVICE.”
The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use “CONNECT“ (or activate
“AUTO CNNCT”) to connect the same device from
next time on. (See the following and page 19.)
3
4
Select “OPEN.”
Connecting a device
Perform steps 1 and 2 on left column, then...
1
• Select “SEARCH” to search for available
devices.
The unit searches and displays the list of the
available devices. If no available device is
detected, “UNFOUND” appears.
• Select “SPECIAL” to connect a special
device.
Enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number)
code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number). [Initial: 0000]
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
1
Move to the next (or previous) number
position.
2
3
Select a device you want to connect.
2
Select a number.
• For available devices...
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to the
unit.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering a PIN code.
Confirm the entry.
Use the Bluetooth device to connect.
Now connection is established and you can use
the device through the unit.
“OPEN..” flashes on the display.
• For special device...
Use “OPEN” or “SEARCH” to connect.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All ManualsESXeTaErcRhNAAndLDDowEVnlIoCaEd.S 11
3
• Select “CONNECT” or “DISCONNECT” to
connect/disconnect the selected device.
• Select “DELETE,” then “YES” to delete the
selected device.
Connecting/disconnecting/deleting a
registered device
1
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
2
Select a registered device you want to
connect/disconnect/delete.
You can set the unit to connect the Bluetooth device
automatically when the unit is turned on. (See
“AUTO CNNCT” on page 19.)
Using the Bluetooth cellular phone
Select “BT-PHONE.”
1
2
Enter the Bluetooth menu.
Make a call or setting using the Bluetooth setting menu.
(See the following and page 19.)
3
—
When a call comes in....
When a text message comes in....
The source is automatically changed to “BT-PHONE.”
• The display will flash in blue (see “RING COLOR”
on page 21 for setting.)
If the cellular phone is compatible with text message
(notified through JVC Bluetooth adapter) and “MSG
INFO” (message info) is set to “AUTO” (see page 19), the
unit rings to inform you of the message arrival.
• “RCV MESSAGE” (receiving message) appears on
the display and the display illuminate in blue (see
“RING COLOR” on page 21 for setting).
When “AUTO ANSWER” is activated....
The unit answers the incoming calls automatically, see
page 19.
• When “AUTO ANSWER” is deactivated, press any
button (except
incoming call.
/
/0) to answer the
Making a call
• You can adjust the microphone volume level (see
page 19).
You can make a call using the following methods.
Select “BT-PHONE,” then follow the following steps to
make a call:
To end the call
Hold any button (except
/
/0).
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
1
Enter the “DIAL” menu.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Speak the name you want to call.
• If your cellular phone does not support the
voice recognition system, “ERROR” appears
on the display.
• Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy
environment or during an emergency.
2
Select a calling method.
Call history:
1
Select a call history (REDIAL*, RECEIVED*,
MISSED*).
2
Then select a name (if it is acquired) or phone
number.
Using the Bluetooth audio
player
Select “BT-AUDIO.”
If playback does not start, operate
the Bluetooth audio player to start
playback.
Phone book:
1
Select “PHONE BOOK*”.
• Operate the Bluetooth audio
player to pause (if playback does
not pause when you change the
source).
The list of phone number appears.
Select a name from the list.
2
Direct dialing:
Reverse skip/forward skip
1
Select “NUMBER.”
Pause/start playback*
* Operation may be different
according to the connected
Bluetooth audio player.
2
Enter the phone number.
Enter setting menu (Device list)
• Refer also to page 12 for connecting/disconnecting/
deleting a registered device.
Bluetooth Information:
* Displays only when your cellular phone is equipped
with these functions and is compatible with this unit.
If you wish to receive more information about
Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English
website only)
Voice dialing:
1
Select “VOICE DIAL.”
“SAY NAME” appears on the display.
EXTERNAL DEVICES 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer (separately purchased) with your unit. You can connect
a CD changer to the CD changer jack on the rear of the unit.
• You can only play conventional CDs (including CD Text) and MP3 discs.
Preparation: Make sure “CH / IPOD” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 22.
Select “CD-CH.”
1
2
Enter the list mode.
Select a disc, folder, then the track.
Playback starts automatically.
• If there is no disc on the selected tray, the unit beeps.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
• To select a desired folder/track to start playback (for MP3 discs), repeat step 2 and 3 above until the desired
folder/track is selected. The selection always start from disc number first.
MP3: Select folders
REPEAT
TRACK RPT
FOLDER RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
MP3: Repeats all tracks of current
folder
[Press] Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
DISC RPT
:
Repeats all tracks of the current
disc
RANDOM
Selecting the playback modes
FOLDER RND
:
MP3: Randomly plays all tracks of
the current folder, then tracks of
the next folder
1
2
DISC RND
ALL RND
:
:
Randomly plays all tracks of current
disc
Randomly plays all tracks of the
discs in the magazine
[Turn] = [Press]
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the iPod
Before operating, connect the Interface adapter for iPod, KS-PD100 (separately purchased) to the CD changer
jack on the rear of the unit.
Preparation: Make sure “CH / IPOD” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 22.
Select “IPOD.”
1
2
Select a song.
Playback starts automatically.
Selecting a track from the menu
Selecting the playback modes
1
2
Enter the main menu.
1
2
This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about 5 seconds.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select the desired menu.
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
PLAYLISTS Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSERS Ô (back
to the beginning)
REPEAT
ONE RPT
:
:
Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod.
3
Confirm the selection.
ALL RPT
Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod.
RANDOM
• To return to the previous menu, press 5.
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
ALBUM RND*
:
:
Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
SONG RND
Functions the same as “Shuffle
Songs” of the iPod.
Pause playback
• To resume playback, press the button
again.
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
[Press] Select tracks
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of the
main “MENU.”
EXTERNAL DEVICES 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the other external components
You can connect an external component to:
• CD changer jack on the rear of this unit using the following adapters:
–Line Input Adapter, KS-U57 (separately purchsed)
–AUX Input Adapter, KS-U58 (separately purchsed)
Preparation: Make sure “EXT INPUT” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 22.
• AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 22.
Select “EXT INPUT” or “AUX IN.”
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
Adjust the volume.
—
2
3
Adjust the sound as you want (see pages 17 and 18).
—
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack
Portable audio player, etc.
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
16 EXTERNAL DEVICES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
• See also page 20 (“EQ”).
Selecting from Menu.
or
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ”
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset value
Sound
BASS
MIDDLE
Freq. Level
TREBLE
LOUD
mode
(loudness)
Freq. Level
Q
Q
Freq. Level
Q
USER
60 Hz
100 Hz
80 Hz
00 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+01 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+02 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+04 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
00 Q1.0 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
+01 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
–02 Q1.0 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25
ROCK
+02 Q1.25
+03 Q1.25
+02 Q1.25
+01 Q1.25
+03 Q1.25
CLASSIC
POPS
OFF
100 Hz
60 Hz
HIP HOP
JAZZ
80 Hz
Freq.: Frequency Q: Q-slope
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnlIoNaGd.S 17
3
4
Select a tone.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and
[Turn] = [Press]
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
1
2
Select “FM” or “AM.”
Adjust the sound elements of the selected
tone.
Show the title entry screen.
[Turn] = [Press]
1
2
3
Adjust the frequency.
Adjust the level.
Adjust the Q-slope.
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character.
Range/selectable items
BASS MIDDLE TREBLE
Sound
elements
Frequency
60 Hz
80 Hz
500 Hz 7.5 kHz
1.0 kHz 10.0 kHz
100 Hz 1.5 kHz 12.5 kHz
120 Hz 2.5 kHz 15.0 kHz
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
Level
Q
–06 to –06 to –06 to
+06
+06
+06
Q0.5
Q1.0
Q1.5
Q2.0
Q0.75
Q1.0
Q1.25
Q1.5
Q0.75
Q1.25
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering the title.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other sound
characteristics.
4
Finish the procedure.
The adjustment made will be stored automatically.
To erase the entire title
In step 2 above...
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bluetooth settings
You can change the settings listed on the right column
according to your preference.
Setting menu ( : Initial)
AUTO CNNCT (connect)
When the unit is turned on, the connection is
established automatically with...
1
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
Enter the Bluetooth menu.
OFF:
No Bluetooth device.
2
LAST: The last connected Bluetooth device.
ORDER: The available registered Bluetooth device
found at first.
AUTO ANSWER
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
3
4
Select “SETTINGS.”
ON:
The unit answers the incoming calls
automatically.
OFF:
The unit does not answer the calls
automatically. Answer the calls manually.
Select a setting item.
REJECT: The unit rejects all incoming calls.
MSG INFO (message info)
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
AUTOMATIC: The unit informs you of the arrival of
a message by ringing and displaying
“RCV MESSAGE” (receiving message).
• The display illuminate in blue (see
“RING COLOR” on page 21).
1
*
*
Appears only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected.
Appears only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected and it is compatible with text message
(notified through JVC Bluetooth adapter).
Bluetooth Audio: Shows only “Version.”
2
3
MANUAL: The unit does not inform you of the
arrival of a message.
*
MIC SETTING (microphone setting)
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth
adapter, [LEVEL 01/02/03].
5
Change the setting accordingly.
VERSION
The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are
shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnlIoNaGd.S 19
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].
Cancels.
demonstration • DEMO OFF
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON
Clock display
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [7].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].
[Initial: 1:00]
EQ
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Equalizer
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
TAG DISPLAY
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
*
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
MONO*3
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo
effect will be lost, [8].
• MONO OFF
• AUTO
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.
IF BAND
Intermediate
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
frequency band • WIDE
:
COLOR 01
– COLOR 29,
USER
:
Select one of the preset or user color for display and button (except EQ/
/0) illumination.
(See also page 23 for USER color setting.)
MENU COLOR
Menu color
• OFF
• ON
:
:
Cancels.
Changes the display and button (except EQ/
/0)
illumination during menu, list search and playback mode
operations.
RING COLOR*4 • OFF
:
:
Cancels.
Ring color
• ON
When a call comes in, the display will flash in blue.
• The display will change to the original color when the call is
answered or the incoming call stops.
When the unit receive a text message, the display only
illuminate in blue.
FADER*5
Fader
BALANCE*6
Balance
R06 – F06
L06 – R06
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced
sound at a low volume level.
VOL ADJUST
Volume adjust
VOL ADJ –05
—
:
Preset the volume adjustment level of each source (except
FM), compared to the FM volume level. The volume level will
VOL ADJ +05 automatically increase or decrease when you change the source.
[Initial:
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you want to
VOL ADJ 00]
adjust.
• “VOL ADJ FIX” appears on the display if “FM” is selected as the
source.
3
4
5
6
*
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
Displayed only when Bluetooth adapter, KS-BTA200 is connected.
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnlIoNaGd.S 21
Category Menu items
L/O MODE
Selectable settings, [reference page]
• SUB.W
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting
a subwoofer (through an external amplifier).
Line output mode
• REAR
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting
the speakers (through an external amplifier).
SUB.W FREQ*7 • LOW
Subwoofer cutoff • MID
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 72 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 111 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 157 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
frequency
• HIGH
SUB.W LEVEL*7 SUB.W 00
Subwoofer level — SUB.W 08
:
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
[Initial: SUB.W 04]
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*8
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
AM*9
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].
EXT IN*10
External input
• CH / IPOD
• EXT INPUT
:
:
To use a JVC CD changer, [14], or an Apple iPod, [15].
To connect portable audio player to the CD changer jack, [16].
AUX IN*11
Auxiliary input
• AUX OFF
• AUX ON
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].
7
8
*
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, Bluetooth, or AUX IN.
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
9
*
*
*
10
11
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color settings
Creating your own color
—USER Color
You can create your own colors—“DAY COLOR” or
“NIGHT COLOR.”
DAY COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER OFF.”
NIGHT COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER ON.”
5
6
Select a primary color.
[Turn] = [Press]
Adjust the level (00 to 31) of the selected
primary color.
1
[Turn] = [Press]
2
3
4
Select “COLOR” = “USER.”
[Turn] = [Press]
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust other primary
colors.
Exit from the setting.
While “USER” is shown on the display...
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And SDEowTTnlIoNadG.S 23
More about this unit
Basic operations
Disc operations
Turning on the power
Caution for DualDisc playback
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
General
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA
formats.
General
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as
those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD
(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
Bluetooth operations
General
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on the
circumstances around you.
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• ERROR CNNCT (Error Connection):
The device is registered but the connection has failed.
Use “CONNECT” to connect the device again. (See
page 12.)
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• ERROR
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
Try the operation again. If “ERROR” appears again,
check if the device supports the function you have
tried.
• UNFOUND
No available Bluetooth device is detected by
“SEARCH.”
• LOADING
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• If the text information includes more than 11
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can
display up to 40 characters.
The unit is updating the phone book*.
* Displays only when your cellular phone is equipped
with these functions and is compatible with this unit.
• PLEASE WAIT
The unit is preparing to use the Bluetooth function. If
the message does not disappear, turn off and turn on
the unit, then connect the device again (or reset the
unit).
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc.
co.jp/english/car/> (English website only)
• RESET 8
Check the connection between the adapter and this
unit.
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
iPod
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
Menu operations
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
– iPod photo
– iPod nano*1
– iPod video (5th Generation)*2
– iPod classic 2007*2
– iPod nano (3rd Generation)*2
1
*
When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu.
2
*
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 22).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 22).
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit. The unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio device at a time.
While connecting a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected
device and search again.
• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select “OPEN” on the unit to connect
the device. (See page 11.)
* For Bluetooth operations, refer also to the instructions supplied with the Bluetooth Adapter.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device.
• Select the device name from “SPECIAL,” then try to
connect again. (See page 11.)
• Try to pair/connect from the Bluetooth device.
• Echo or noise occurs.
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Phone sound quality is poor.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the
Bluetooth cellular phone.
• Move the car to a place where you can get a better
signal reception.
• The sound is interrupted or skipped during • Reduce the distance between the unit and the
playback of a Bluetooth audio device.
Bluetooth audio device.
• Disconnect the device connected for “BT-PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the
device again.
• The connected audio device cannot be
controlled.
Check whether the connected audio device supports
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “NO MAGAZINE” appears on the display.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
• The CD changer does not work at all.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work. • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
• The sound is distorted.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
• “NO IPOD” appears on the display.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Charge the battery.
• Playback stops.
The headphones are disconnected during playback.
Restart the playback operation (see page 15).
• No sound can be heard when connecting
an iPod nano.
• Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod.
Then, connect it again.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Victor
Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
REFERENCES 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz)
Q0.5, Q1.0, Q1.5, Q2.0
Middle:
Treble:
12 dB (500 Hz, 1.0 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz)
Q0.75, Q1.0, Q1.25, Q1.5
12 dB (7.5 kHz, 10.0 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
15.0 kHz)
Q0.75, Q1.25
Frequency Response:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, CD changer jack,
Antenna input
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
AM:
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
AM Tuner
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
96 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
Panel Size:
Mass:
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
REFERENCES 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0808DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-R404
Installation/Connection Manual
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN
GET0572-002A
[UI]
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car
audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the
rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 22 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring
in your car.
Do the required electrical connections.
Bend the appropriate tabs to
hold the sleeve firmly in place.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio
dealer immediately.
Removing the unit
A / B
Hard case/Control
panel
C
Sleeve
D
E
Trim plate
Power cord
H
F
G
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm;
M5 × 12.5 mm)
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated
so that the unit can be removed.
Washer (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
I
J
K
L
When using the optional stay
When installing the unit
without using the sleeve
Rubber
cushion
Handles
Remote controller
Battery
Stay (option)
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the
car radio and install the unit in its place.
Fire wall
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
Dashboard
Bracket*2
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
Screw (option)
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
Pocket
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
Flat head screws
(M5 × 8 mm)*2
• Sound is distorted.
Bracket*2
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
Note : When installing the unit on the
mounting bracket, make sure to
use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer
screws are used, they could damage
the unit.
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
Install the unit at an
angle of less than 30˚.
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
1
2
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A
Typical connections
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Rear ground terminal
Rear line out (see diagram
)
15 A fuse
Antenna terminal
To external components (see diagram
)
Ignition switch
Black
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
Yellow *2
Red
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Fuse block
Blue
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Blue with white stripe
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
White with black stripe
White
Gray with black stripe
Gray
Green with black stripe
Green
Purple with black stripe
Purple
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
B
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
Remote lead
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 22 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
To the remote lead of other equipment or
automatic antenna if any
JVC Amplifier
Rear speakers
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page 22 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
Front speakers
or
JVC Amplifier
Subwoofer
C
Connecting the external components
When connecting the external components, refer also to the manuals supplied for the components and
adapter.
When connecting more than one component (maximum: two), it is recommended that you connect
the components in series as explained below.
CAUTION:
When connecting two components in series
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer jack.
4
*
JVC component
Model name
CD changer jack
CD changer (CD-CH)
CH-X1500, etc.
A
KS-BTA200
You can also connect the following components through the various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
B*4 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58
Component
Adapter
Model name
To disconnect the connector
Bluetooth device
Bluetooth adapter
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57
iPod
Interface adapter for iPod
Line input adapter
Portable audio player with line output jacks
Portable audio player with 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Hold the connector tightly (1), then pull it out (2).
AUX input adapter
KS-U58
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
3
4
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power
cannot be turned on.
*
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD RECEIVER
KD-R406/KD-R405
KD-R406/KD-R405
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0571-001A
[U/UH]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
[European Union only]
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to
avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of
the output level.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to reset your unit
CONTENTS
OPERATIONS
Basic operations...........................................
• Using the control panel...............................
• Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)......
Preparation..................................................
Listening to the radio...................................
Disc operations.............................................
4
4
5
7
8
9
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased (except the
registered Bluetooth device, see page 10).
EXTERNAL DEVICES
How to forcibly eject a disc
Using the Bluetooth® devices....................... 10
• Using the Bluetooth cellular phone ............ 12
• Using the Bluetooth audio player ............... 13
Listening to the CD changer ......................... 14
Listening to the iPod.................................... 15
Listening to the other external
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
components.............................................. 16
Detaching the control panel
Attaching the control panel
SETTINGS
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 17
Title assignment .......................................... 18
Bluetooth settings ....................................... 19
Menu operations.......................................... 20
Color settings............................................... 23
REFERENCES
More about this unit .................................... 24
Troubleshooting........................................... 27
Maintenance................................................ 31
Specifications............................................... 32
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operations
Using the control panel
1
• FM/AM: Select preset station.
• CD/CD-CH: Select folder.
• IPOD: Enter the main menu/Pause playback/
Confirm selection.
• BT-PHONE/BT-AUDIO: Enter/go back to
previous Bluetooth menu.
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).
• Turn off the power [Hold].
Select the source.
FM = AM*1 = CD*2 = CD-CH*2/IPOD*2 (or
EXT INPUT) = BT-PHONE*2 = BT-AUDIO*2 =
AUX IN*1 = (back to the beginning)
• Enter list operations.
8
9
p
q
w
Eject disc.
Select the sound mode.
Detach the panel.
Change the display information.
• FM/AM: Search for station.
• CD/CD-CH: Select track.
• IPOD: Select track.
• BT-PHONE/BT-AUDIO: Select setting item/
registered device.
2
3
e
r
t
Return to the previous menu.
Remote sensor
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
4
5
1
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 22).
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready
or not connected.
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*3
• Confirm the selection [Press].*3
• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*3
• CD/CD-CH/IPOD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*3
Loading slot
2
*
3
*
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.
6
7
Display window
You can change the display and button illumination (see “COLOR” on page 21).
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display window
1
2
3
Bluetooth indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Status of Bluetooth device
(Device number, [P: 1 – 5]; signal strength,
6
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,
ROCK, POPS, USER
EQ (equalizer) indicator
7
8
9
LOUD (loudness) indicator
[
: 0 – 3]*; battery reminder, [ : 0 – 3]*)
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
Main display
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),
MO (monaural)
* As the number increases, the signal/battery power
becomes stronger.
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Time countdown indicator
p
q
4
5
Playback source indicators—CH (CD changer), DISC
w
Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Caution:
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire, or the like.
Remote sensor
If the effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace the battery.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcOh APnEdRDAoTwInOloNaSd.
5
6
7
For Bluetooth cellular phone:
– Answers calls if pressed briefly.
– Rejects calls if pressed and held.
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
• Reverse skip/forward skip for Bluetooth audio.
1
2
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
• Changes the preset stations.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.
• While playing an MP3 disc on an
MP3-compatible CD changer:
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.
• While listening to an Apple iPod:
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such
as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long
time.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot
reach.
• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,
or dispose of it in a fire.
• Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
3
4
5
Adjusts the volume level.
Selects the sound mode.
Selects the source.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
Cancel the display demonstration and set the clock
• See also page 20.
Turn on the power.
1
Cancel the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2
Set the clock
Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust
the minute.
[Turn] = [Press]
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
When the power is turned off: Check the current clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to
“CLOCK OFF,” (see page 20)
When the power is turned on: Change the display information of the current source
FM/AM
Station name*1 = Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)
CD/CD-CH
Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*2 = Track title*2 = Current track number with the
elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time = (back
to the beginning)
MP3/WMA:
Album name/performer (folder name)*3 = Track title (file name)*3 =
Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
IPOD
Folder name = Track name = Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current
track number with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
1
*
*
*
If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 18.
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 20),
folder name and file name appear.
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcOh APnEdRDAoTwInOloNaSd.
7
Listening to the radio
Select “FM” or “AM.”
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,
then press it repeatedly.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”
lights up on the display.
When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
• See also page 21.
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
1
While listening to a station...
[Turn] = [Press]
2
Select the preset number range you want to
store.
Select “TUNER” = “MONO”
= “MONO ON”
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• “MO” lights up on the display.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator
goes off.
3
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically.
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations
3
for AM.
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset
number “04.”
Selecting preset station
1
or
2
Select preset number “04.”
[Turn] = [Press]
Disc operations
Turn on the power.
Insert a disc.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change
the source or eject the disc.
1
2
Stop playing and ejecting the disc
Selecting a track/folder
• “NO DISC” appears.
Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Prohibiting disc ejection
[Turn] = [Press]
• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder, then
the desired track by performing the control dial.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcOh APnEdRDAoTwInOloNaSd.
9
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you
to...
Using the Bluetooth®
devices
MP3/WMA: Select folder
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect
the Bluetooth adapter (KS-BTA200) (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this
unit.
[Press]Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to check
the countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
To use a Bluetooth device through the unit
(“BT-PHONE” and “BT-AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
2
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
[Turn] = [Press]
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“BT-PHONE” and “BT-AUDIO”).
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Registering a Bluetooth device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Use either of the following items in the Bluetooth menu
to register and establish the connection with a device.
• Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO” as the source to
operate the Bluetooth menu.
REPEAT
TRACK RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
FOLDER RPT
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder
RANDOM
OPEN
Make the unit ready to establish a new
Bluetooth connection.
FOLDER RND
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all
tracks of current folder, then tracks
of next folders
Connection is established by operating the
Bluetooth device.
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
SEARCH Make the unit ready to establish a new
Bluetooth connection.
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Connection is established by operating
the unit.
10 OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering using “OPEN”
Preparation: Operate the device to turn on its
5
Use the Bluetooth device to search and
connect.
On the device to be connected, enter the same
PIN code you have just entered for this unit.
“CONNECTED” appears on the display.
Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.
Bluetooth function.
1
2
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
Select “NEW DEVICE.”
The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use “CONNECT“ (or activate
“AUTO CNNCT”) to connect the same device from
next time on. (See the following and page 19.)
3
4
Select “OPEN.”
Connecting a device
Perform steps 1 and 2 on left column, then...
1
• Select “SEARCH” to search for available
devices.
The unit searches and displays the list of the
available devices. If no available device is
detected, “UNFOUND” appears.
• Select “SPECIAL” to connect a special
device.
Enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number)
code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number). [Initial: 0000]
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
1
Move to the next (or previous) number
position.
2
3
Select a device you want to connect.
2
Select a number.
• For available devices...
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to the
unit.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering a PIN code.
Confirm the entry.
Use the Bluetooth device to connect.
Now connection is established and you can use
the device through the unit.
“OPEN..” flashes on the display.
• For special device...
Use “OPEN” or “SEARCH” to connect.
Continued on the next page
EXTERNAL DEVICES 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
• Select “CONNECT” or “DISCONNECT” to
connect/disconnect the selected device.
• Select “DELETE,” then “YES” to delete the
selected device.
Connecting/disconnecting/deleting a
registered device
1
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
2
Select a registered device you want to
connect/disconnect/delete.
You can set the unit to connect the Bluetooth device
automatically when the unit is turned on. (See
“AUTO CNNCT” on page 19.)
Using the Bluetooth cellular phone
Select “BT-PHONE.”
1
2
Enter the Bluetooth menu.
Make a call or setting using the Bluetooth setting menu.
(See the following and page 19.)
3
—
When a call comes in....
When a text message comes in....
The source is automatically changed to “BT-PHONE.”
• The display will flash in blue (see “RING COLOR”
on page 21 for setting.)
If the cellular phone is compatible with text message
(notified through JVC Bluetooth adapter) and “MSG
INFO” (message info) is set to “AUTO” (see page 19), the
unit rings to inform you of the message arrival.
• “RCV MESSAGE” (receiving message) appears on
the display and the display illuminate in blue (see
“RING COLOR” on page 21 for setting).
When “AUTO ANSWER” is activated....
The unit answers the incoming calls automatically, see
page 19.
• When “AUTO ANSWER” is deactivated, press any
button (except
incoming call.
/
/0) to answer the
Making a call
• You can adjust the microphone volume level (see
page 19).
You can make a call using the following methods.
Select “BT-PHONE,” then follow the following steps to
make a call:
To end the call
Hold any button (except
/
/0).
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
1
Enter the “DIAL” menu.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Speak the name you want to call.
• If your cellular phone does not support the
voice recognition system, “ERROR” appears
on the display.
• Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy
environment or during an emergency.
2
Select a calling method.
Call history:
1
Select a call history (REDIAL*, RECEIVED*,
MISSED*).
2
Then select a name (if it is acquired) or phone
number.
Using the Bluetooth audio
player
Select “BT-AUDIO.”
If playback does not start, operate
the Bluetooth audio player to start
playback.
Phone book:
1
Select “PHONE BOOK*”.
• Operate the Bluetooth audio
player to pause (if playback does
not pause when you change the
source).
The list of phone number appears.
Select a name from the list.
2
Direct dialing:
Reverse skip/forward skip
1
Select “NUMBER.”
Pause/start playback*
* Operation may be different
according to the connected
Bluetooth audio player.
2
Enter the phone number.
Enter setting menu (Device list)
• Refer also to page 12 for connecting/disconnecting/
deleting a registered device.
Bluetooth Information:
* Displays only when your cellular phone is equipped
with these functions and is compatible with this unit.
If you wish to receive more information about
Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English
website only)
Voice dialing:
1
Select “VOICE DIAL.”
“SAY NAME” appears on the display.
EXTERNAL DEVICES 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer (separately purchased) with your unit. You can connect
a CD changer to the CD changer jack on the rear of the unit.
• You can only play conventional CDs (including CD Text) and MP3 discs.
Preparation: Make sure “CH / IPOD” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 22.
Select “CD-CH.”
1
2
Enter the list mode.
Select a disc, folder, then the track.
Playback starts automatically.
• If there is no disc on the selected tray, the unit beeps.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
• To select a desired folder/track to start playback (for MP3 discs), repeat step 2 and 3 above until the desired
folder/track is selected. The selection always start from disc number first.
MP3: Select folders
REPEAT
TRACK RPT
FOLDER RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
MP3: Repeats all tracks of current
folder
[Press] Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
DISC RPT
:
Repeats all tracks of the current
disc
RANDOM
Selecting the playback modes
FOLDER RND
:
MP3: Randomly plays all tracks of
the current folder, then tracks of
the next folder
1
2
DISC RND
ALL RND
:
:
Randomly plays all tracks of current
disc
Randomly plays all tracks of the
discs in the magazine
[Turn] = [Press]
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the iPod
Before operating, connect the Interface adapter for iPod, KS-PD100 (separately purchased) to the CD changer
jack on the rear of the unit.
Preparation: Make sure “CH / IPOD” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 22.
Select “IPOD.”
1
2
Select a song.
Playback starts automatically.
Selecting a track from the menu
Selecting the playback modes
1
2
Enter the main menu.
1
2
This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about 5 seconds.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select the desired menu.
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
PLAYLISTS Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSERS Ô (back
to the beginning)
REPEAT
ONE RPT
:
:
Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod.
3
Confirm the selection.
ALL RPT
Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod.
RANDOM
• To return to the previous menu, press 5.
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
ALBUM RND*
:
:
Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
SONG RND
Functions the same as “Shuffle
Songs” of the iPod.
Pause playback
• To resume playback, press the button
again.
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
[Press] Select tracks
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of the
main “MENU.”
EXTERNAL DEVICES 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the other external components
You can connect an external component to:
• CD changer jack on the rear of this unit using the following adapters:
–Line Input Adapter, KS-U57 (separately purchsed)
–AUX Input Adapter, KS-U58 (separately purchsed)
Preparation: Make sure “EXT INPUT” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 22.
• AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 22.
Select “EXT INPUT” or “AUX IN.”
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
Adjust the volume.
—
2
3
Adjust the sound as you want (see pages 17 and 18).
—
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack
Portable audio player, etc.
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
16 EXTERNAL DEVICES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
• See also page 20 (“EQ”).
Selecting from Menu.
or
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ”
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset value
Sound
BASS
MIDDLE
Freq. Level
TREBLE
LOUD
mode
(loudness)
Freq. Level
Q
Q
Freq. Level
Q
USER
60 Hz
100 Hz
80 Hz
00 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+01 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+02 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+04 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
00 Q1.0 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
+01 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
–02 Q1.0 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25
ROCK
+02 Q1.25
+03 Q1.25
+02 Q1.25
+01 Q1.25
+03 Q1.25
CLASSIC
POPS
OFF
100 Hz
60 Hz
HIP HOP
JAZZ
80 Hz
Freq.: Frequency Q: Q-slope
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnIlNoaGd.S 17
3
4
Select a tone.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and
[Turn] = [Press]
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
1
2
Select “FM” or “AM.”
Adjust the sound elements of the selected
tone.
Show the title entry screen.
[Turn] = [Press]
1
2
3
Adjust the frequency.
Adjust the level.
Adjust the Q-slope.
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character.
Range/selectable items
BASS MIDDLE TREBLE
Sound
elements
Frequency
60 Hz
80 Hz
500 Hz 7.5 kHz
1.0 kHz 10.0 kHz
100 Hz 1.5 kHz 12.5 kHz
120 Hz 2.5 kHz 15.0 kHz
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
Level
Q
–06 to –06 to –06 to
+06
+06
+06
Q0.5
Q1.0
Q1.5
Q2.0
Q0.75
Q1.0
Q1.25
Q1.5
Q0.75
Q1.25
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering the title.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other sound
characteristics.
4
Finish the procedure.
The adjustment made will be stored automatically.
To erase the entire title
In step 2 above...
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bluetooth settings
You can change the settings listed on the right column
according to your preference.
Setting menu ( : Initial)
AUTO CNNCT (connect)
When the unit is turned on, the connection is
established automatically with...
1
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
Enter the Bluetooth menu.
OFF:
No Bluetooth device.
2
LAST: The last connected Bluetooth device.
ORDER: The available registered Bluetooth device
found at first.
AUTO ANSWER
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
3
4
Select “SETTINGS.”
ON:
The unit answers the incoming calls
automatically.
OFF:
The unit does not answer the calls
automatically. Answer the calls manually.
Select a setting item.
REJECT: The unit rejects all incoming calls.
MSG INFO (message info)
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
AUTOMATIC: The unit informs you of the arrival of
a message by ringing and displaying
“RCV MESSAGE” (receiving message).
• The display illuminate in blue (see
“RING COLOR” on page 21).
1
*
*
Appears only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected.
Appears only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected and it is compatible with text message
(notified through JVC Bluetooth adapter).
Bluetooth Audio: Shows only “Version.”
2
3
MANUAL: The unit does not inform you of the
arrival of a message.
*
MIC SETTING (microphone setting)
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth
adapter, [LEVEL 01/02/03].
5
Change the setting accordingly.
VERSION
The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are
shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnIlNoaGd.S 19
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].
Cancels.
demonstration • DEMO OFF
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON
Clock display
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].
[Initial: 1:00]
EQ
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Equalizer
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
TAG DISPLAY
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
*
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
MONO*3
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo
effect will be lost, [8].
• MONO OFF
• AUTO
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.
IF BAND
Intermediate
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
frequency band • WIDE
:
COLOR 01
– COLOR 29,
USER
:
Select one of the preset or user color for display and button (except EQ/
/0) illumination.
(See also page 23 for USER color setting.)
MENU COLOR
Menu color
• OFF
• ON
:
:
Cancels.
Changes the display and button (except EQ/
/0)
illumination during menu, list search and playback mode
operations.
RING COLOR*4 • OFF
:
:
Cancels.
Ring color
• ON
When a call comes in, the display will flash in blue.
• The display will change to the original color when the call is
answered or the incoming call stops.
When the unit receive a text message, the display only
illuminate in blue.
FADER*5
Fader
BALANCE*6
Balance
R06 – F06
L06 – R06
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced
sound at a low volume level.
VOL ADJUST
Volume adjust
VOL ADJ –05
—
:
Preset the volume adjustment level of each source (except
FM), compared to the FM volume level. The volume level will
VOL ADJ +05 automatically increase or decrease when you change the source.
[Initial:
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you want to
VOL ADJ 00]
adjust.
• “VOL ADJ FIX” appears on the display if “FM” is selected as the
source.
3
4
5
6
*
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
Displayed only when Bluetooth adapter, KS-BTA200 is connected.
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnIlNoaGd.S 21
Category Menu items
L/O MODE
Selectable settings, [reference page]
• SUB.W
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting
a subwoofer (through an external amplifier).
Line output mode
• REAR
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting
the speakers (through an external amplifier).
SUB.W FREQ*7 • LOW
Subwoofer cutoff • MID
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 72 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 111 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 157 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
frequency
• HIGH
SUB.W LEVEL*7 SUB.W 00
Subwoofer level — SUB.W 08
:
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
[Initial: SUB.W 04]
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*8
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
AM*9
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].
EXT IN*10
External input
• CH / IPOD
• EXT INPUT
:
:
To use a JVC CD changer, [14], or an Apple iPod, [15].
To connect portable audio player to the CD changer jack, [16].
AUX IN*11
Auxiliary input
• AUX OFF
• AUX ON
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].
7
8
*
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, Bluetooth, or AUX IN.
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
9
*
*
*
10
11
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color settings
Creating your own color
—USER Color
You can create your own colors—“DAY COLOR” or
“NIGHT COLOR.”
DAY COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER OFF.”
NIGHT COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER ON.”
5
6
Select a primary color.
[Turn] = [Press]
Adjust the level (00 to 31) of the selected
primary color.
1
[Turn] = [Press]
2
3
4
Select “COLOR” = “USER.”
[Turn] = [Press]
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust other primary
colors.
Exit from the setting.
While “USER” is shown on the display...
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnIloNaGd.S 23
More about this unit
Basic operations
Disc operations
Turning on the power
Caution for DualDisc playback
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
General
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA
formats.
General
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as
those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD
(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
Bluetooth operations
General
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on the
circumstances around you.
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• ERROR CNNCT (Error Connection):
The device is registered but the connection has failed.
Use “CONNECT” to connect the device again. (See
page 12.)
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• ERROR
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
Try the operation again. If “ERROR” appears again,
check if the device supports the function you have
tried.
• UNFOUND
No available Bluetooth device is detected by
“SEARCH.”
• LOADING
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• If the text information includes more than 11
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can
display up to 40 characters.
The unit is updating the phone book*.
* Displays only when your cellular phone is equipped
with these functions and is compatible with this unit.
• PLEASE WAIT
The unit is preparing to use the Bluetooth function. If
the message does not disappear, turn off and turn on
the unit, then connect the device again (or reset the
unit).
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc.
co.jp/english/car/> (English website only)
• RESET 8
Check the connection between the adapter and this
unit.
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
iPod
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
Menu operations
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
– iPod photo
– iPod nano*1
– iPod video (5th Generation)*2
– iPod classic 2007*2
– iPod nano (3rd Generation)*2
1
*
When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu.
2
*
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 22).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 22).
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit. The unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio device at a time.
While connecting a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected
device and search again.
• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select “OPEN” on the unit to connect
the device. (See page 11.)
* For Bluetooth operations, refer also to the instructions supplied with the Bluetooth Adapter.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device.
• Select the device name from “SPECIAL,” then try to
connect again. (See page 11.)
• Try to pair/connect from the Bluetooth device.
• Echo or noise occurs.
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Phone sound quality is poor.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the
Bluetooth cellular phone.
• Move the car to a place where you can get a better
signal reception.
• The sound is interrupted or skipped during • Reduce the distance between the unit and the
playback of a Bluetooth audio device.
Bluetooth audio device.
• Disconnect the device connected for “BT-PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the
device again.
• The connected audio device cannot be
controlled.
Check whether the connected audio device supports
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “NO MAGAZINE” appears on the display.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
• The CD changer does not work at all.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work. • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
• The sound is distorted.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
• “NO IPOD” appears on the display.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Charge the battery.
• Playback stops.
The headphones are disconnected during playback.
Restart the playback operation (see page 15).
• No sound can be heard when connecting
an iPod nano.
• Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod.
Then, connect it again.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Victor
Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
REFERENCES 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz)
Q0.5, Q1.0, Q1.5, Q2.0
Middle:
Treble:
12 dB (500 Hz, 1.0 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz)
Q0.75, Q1.0, Q1.25, Q1.5
12 dB (7.5 kHz, 10.0 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
15.0 kHz)
Q0.75, Q1.25
Frequency Response:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, CD changer jack,
Antenna input
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
AM:
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
AM Tuner
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
96 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
Panel Size:
Mass:
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
REFERENCES 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN, TH
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0808DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-R406/KD-R405
Installation/Connection Manual
°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, TH
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0571-006A
[U/UH]
‰∑¬
ENGLISH
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫‰¥π√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õߧÿ ≥‰¡
¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC
§”‡µÕπ
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß
• µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“߇§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
À¡“¬‡Àµ
ÿ
Notes:
• „™æ°¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø« À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ „Àª√°…“√“ π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ߢ∫ ß
ÿ
¥π‡°«“ 50 W (∑ߥ“πÀπ“·≈–¥“πÀ≈ß ¡§“§«“¡µ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂ß 8 Ω)
∂“°”≈ߢ∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√ (¥¥Àπ“ 22 §”·π–π”)
ÿ
• °“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæ㛮 “¬µ–°« ∑ ˉ¡·„™≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæ𠓬‰ø
Ë
• ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫π
ÿ
Heat sink / ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:
•
Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–ππ ™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–√‰∫¥§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬¡“°
• °Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧ ≥‡„√À¬∫√Õ¬‡ ¬°Õπ
ÿ
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π
«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫Àπ“°¡ ß„¥‰¡§√∫ °√
ÿ
≥“°ª…√“µ«·∑π®”À𓬇§√Õ߇ ¬ßµ¥√∂¬πµ JVC ‚¥¬∑π∑
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case/Control panel
Sleeve
Trim plate
Power cord
≈ß∫√√®/À𓪥
ÿ
ª≈Õ°À
ÿ
¡
·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß
“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)
ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
πÕµ≈Õ§ (M5)
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
≈°µ¥ (M4 × 5 ¡¡.; M5 × 12.5 ¡¡.)
Rubber cushion
¬“ß°π°√–·∑°
J
K
L
Handles
§π∫ߧ∫
Remote controller
√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈
Battery
·∫µ‡µÕ√
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
°“√µ¥µß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡‡¢“)
¿“浫լ“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§
¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…
• ™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫“§∂ ≥·‰¡π„®«“µ¥µß™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫∂π°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡ „ÀÀ“™“ߺ‡™¬«™“≠‡ªπºµ¥µß
ÿ
≥ª¡≠À“À√ÕµÕß°“√¢Õ¡≈‡°¬«°∫™ÿ ¥µß °√ÿ ≥“°ª…√“°∫º¢“¬‡§√Õ߇
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
Do the required electrical connections.
µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”À𥉫∑ßÀ¡¥
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
°“√∂Õ¥™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫
°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫ ª„À≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
„ §π∫ߧ∫2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“殓°ππ
„À‡≈Õπ™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°„π¢≥–§∑լʥߧπ∫ߧ∫∑ß Õß
ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π
When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬„‰™¡ª≈Õ°À
ÿ
¡
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
µ«Õ¬“߇™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬ ¥√µ∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑
ÿ
Stay (option)
µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)
Fire wall
ºπß°π‰ø
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2
Dashboard
·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡
Bracket*2
·∑π√Õß√∫*2
Screw (option)
°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2
Pocket
°–‡ª“–
Bracket*2
·∑π√Õß√∫*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
µ¥µß™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫¡∑ ¡”°µ«“ 30˚ Õß»“
ÿ
À¡“¬‡Àµ
:
‡¡Õµ¥µß™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·π∑√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫¬‡À“¬‰¥
1
2
*1 ‡¡Õ§
*2 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™
ÿ
≥ß™µ
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫π¢√–«ßÕ¬“∑”„Àø« ∫√‡«≥ «π∑“¬‡ ¬À“¬
¥ª√–°Õ∫π
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
ÿ
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
‰∑¬
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„™‰øø“
A
Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
°Õπ°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ: µ√«®¥°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø„π√∂¬πµ„À≈–‡Õ¬¥∂∂«π ‡æ√“–°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ∑º¥æ≈“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬
√“¬·√ßµÕ™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫
ÿ
™¥‰¥π
“¬µ–°«¢Õß “¬‰ø·≈–¢ÕßÕ
ÿ
ª°√µ≥Õ‡™Õ¡®“°µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÕ“®¡ ∑‰¡‡À¡Õπ°π
„ªπ¥√“π≈“ß
1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫
2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»
ÿ
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3
ÿ
¥“¬∑µÕ «π§«∫§
ÿ
¡°“√π‡¥“¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫™¥π
ÿ
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Rear line out (see diagram
)
Rear ground terminal
“¬ ≠≠“≥ÕÕ°¥“πÀ≈ß (¥·ºπ¿¡
)
®ÿ
¥Õ‡™¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß
15 A fuse
ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A
To external components (see diagram
)
Antenna terminal
™Õ߇ ¬∫µÕ¢ÕßÕ
ÿ
ª°√¿≥“¬πÕ°(¥·ºπ¿¡
)
¢« “¬Õ“°“»
Ignition switch
«∑™® ¥√–¥‡∫
ÿ
Black
¥”
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ
Yellow *2
‡À≈Õß *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ
( ‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™® ¥√–¥‡∫) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)
ÿ
Fuse block
Red
ᴧ
·ºßø«
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«
Blue
»ø“
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA)
White with black stripe
White
Gray with black stripe
Gray
Green with black stripe
Green
Purple with black stripe
Purple
¢“«·∂∫¥”
¢“«
‡∑“·∂∫¥”
‡∑“
‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”
‡¢¬«
¡«ß·∂∫¥”
¡«ß
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (Àπ“)
≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈ß)
1
*1 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™
*2 °Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™
¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫π
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫°πÕπ∑®–µ¥µß µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡
• ø« ¢“¥
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• ‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• ‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• ‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• ‡ ¬ß√∫°«π
* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• ™ ¥ª√–°ÕÕ∫π√¢π
ÿ
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• ‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡
* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß¿“¬πÕ°
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
§
ÿ
≥ “¡“√Õ∂µ°∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ ‡æ
• µÕ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈ ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢“°∫ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕ
°Õ∫π‰¥
• ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™
◊
Õ¡‡æ§
ÿ
≥ ¿“欇߄À°∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‚Õ¢Õß√∂¬πµ
ÿ
ª°√Õ≥ π Ê
◊
◊
‡æÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫
ÿ
§¡‚¥ÿ¬™¥ª√–
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫π·≈«µÕ‡¢“°∫‡§√Õߢ¬“¬ ∑ß “¬µ–°«≈”‚æߢÕß™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫‰«π
ÿ
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Remote lead
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•
¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫)π
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 22 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic
antenna if any
µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªπ “REAR” (¥Àπ“ 22 §”·π–π”)
µÕ “¬°∫Õ
ÿ
ª°√Õ≥ π◊À√Õ‡ “Õ“°“µ»Õ‚π¡µ∂“¡
◊
JVC Amplifier
Rear speakers
≈”‚æßÀ≈ß
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page 22 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫)π
ÿ
Front speakers
≈”‚æßÀπ“
µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªπ “SUB.W” (¥Àπ“ 22 §”·π–π”)
or
JVC Amplifier
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC
Subwoofer
À√
◊
Õ
´∫«ø‡øÕ√
C
Connecting the external components / °“√µÕ‡æ¡‡µ¡‡¢“°∫Õ ª°√Õ≥πÊ
ÿ
When connecting the external components, refer also to the manuals supplied for the components and
adapter.
‡¡◊
Õ◊‡™Õ¡ÕµÕÿ ª°√¿≥“¬πÕ° „À¥¢Õ¡≈‡°¬«°∫Õÿ ª°√¿≥“¬πÕ°·≈–Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√®“°§¡◊ Õ„À∑¡“¥«¬
CAUTION:
¢Õ§«√√–«ß:
°Õπ®–‡™ Õ¡Õµ°∫Õ ª°√¿≥“¬πÕ° °√ÿ ≥“µ√«® Õ∫·„Àπ„®«“ª¥‡§√◊ ÕßÕ¬
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
◊
ÿ
You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer jack.
∑“π “¡“√∂‡™ Õ¡Õµ«πª√–°Õ∫ JVC µÕ‰ªπ‡¢“°∫™Õ߇ ¬∫´¥‡™π‡®Õ√
◊
JVC component
Model name
«πª√–°Õ∫JVC
™Õ√
ÿ
π
CD changer (CD-CH)
CH-X1500, etc.
´¥‡™π‡®Õ√ (CD-CH)
CH-X1500 œ≈œ
‡™◊
Õ¡Õµ«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπº“πÕ–·¥ª‡µÕ√·∫∫µ“ßÊ ¢Õß JVC ‰¥‡™π°π
Õ “¬‡™Õ¡Õµ“ßÀ“°
You can also connect the following components through the various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
• Õ“®µÕß´
◊
◊
Component
Adapter
Model name
«πª√–°Õ∫
ª°√∫≥≈∑∏
Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√
™Õ√
ÿ
π
Bluetooth device
Bluetooth adapter
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57
Õ
ÿ
Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√∫≈∑∏
iPod
Interface adapter for iPod
Line input adapter
Õπ‡∑Õ√‡ø Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√ ”À√∫√
ÿ
π
iPod
iPod
Portable audio player with line output jacks
Portable audio player with 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
‡§√◊
Õßπ‡≈‡æ≈ß·∫∫æ°æ“ æ√Õ¡¢«µÕ Line Output
Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√ Line Input
Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√ AUX Input
AUX input adapter
KS-U58
‡§√
◊
Õßπ‡≈‡æ≈ß·∫∫æ°æ“ æ√Õ¡™Õ߇ ¬∫·∫∫ 3.5 ¡¡. Stereo
KS-U58
When connecting more than one component (maximum: two), it is recommended that you connect the
components in series as explained below.
Mini
‡¡
◊
Õ◊
‡™Õ¡Õµ«πª√–°Õ∫¡“°°«“Àπß™π
(
ß
ÿ
¥ Õπß™) ¢Õ·π–π”„À∑“π‡™◊ Õ¡Õµ«πª√–°Õ∫·∫∫Õπÿ °√¡µ“¡§”∫Õ∏“¬¢“ß≈“ß
When connecting two components in series /
To disconnect the connector / °“√∂Õ¥µ«‡™Õ¡µÕ
‡¡Õ‡™Õ¡µÕ «πª√–°Õ∫ Õß™π·∫∫Õπ °√¡
ÿ
4
*
Hold the connector tightly (1), then pull it out (2).
®∫µ«‡™ Õ¡Õµ„À·ππ (1) ·≈«¥ßÕÕ° (2)
◊
CD changer jack / ™Õ߇ ¬∫´¥‡™π‡®Õ√
A
KS-BTA200
B*4 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod ‡ªπ‡§√ ÕßÀ¡“¬°““√¢§Õß Apple Inc. ™ß®¥∑–‡∫¬π°“√§“„πª√–‡∑» À√∞Õ‡¡√°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»Õ◊ πÊ
◊
3
4
3
*
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
*
µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂߇À≈° À√
À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”𠇧√ ÕßÕ“®™
*4 „π°“√„™ «πª√–°Õ∫‡À≈“π „Àµß§“°“√√∫ ≠≠“≥Õ
◊
Õ«∂µß√∂
—
µ√ß «π ∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈
◊
Õ
(
∫À“°¡ ‡§≈
◊
Õ∫Õ„¬À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π)
◊
ÿ
”√¥À√Õ¬‡À“¬‰¥
◊
ÿ
ª°√¿≥“¬πÕ°„À∂°µÕß (¥Àπ“ 22 §”·π–π”)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-R406/KD-R405
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, IN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0571-009A
[UN]
INDONESIA
ENGLISH
Unit ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika kendaraan
anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli di penyalur-
penyalur audio mobil JVC.
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
PERINGATAN
WARNINGS
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang unit.
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan unit ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Catatan:
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 22 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan
pita isolasi.
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika
memindahkan unit ini.
Heat sink / Pendingin
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan
sambungan-sambungan speaker:
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,
unit tersebut akan secara serius rusak.
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan
speaker dalam mobil anda.
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan
Parts list for installation and connection
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk unit ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi dealer
audio mobil JVC anda.
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case/Control panel
Kotak keras/Panel kontrol
Sleeve
Selongsong
Trim plate
Plat rapi
Power cord
Kabel power
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)
Perapat sambungan (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Mur kunci (M5)
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Baut bingkai (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Rubber cushion
Bantalan karet
J
K
L
Handles
Pegangan-pegangan
Remote controller
Pengontrol jauh
Battery
Baterai
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.
• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang unit ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan teknisi yang
berkualitas.
Do the required electrical connections.
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan
listrik yang diperlukan.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat
pada tempatnya.
Removing the unit
Memindahkan unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Sebelum memindahkan unit, lepaskan seksi belakang.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga unit dapat
dipindahkan.
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan
penguat tambahan
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang unit tanpa
menggunakan selongsong
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang unit tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.
Stay (option)
Penguat (tambahan)
Fire wall
Dinding tahan api
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
Tempat alat pada bagian
depan
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Screw (option)
Sekrup (tambahan)
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
Kantong
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut
kurang dari 30˚.
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
: Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–
8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.
Catatan
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan unit, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.
2
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
INDONESIA
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK
A
Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada unit.
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke unit.
Rear line out (see diagram
Line out belakang (lihat diagram
)
Rear ground terminal
Terminal tanah belakang
)
15 A fuse
Sekring 15 A
To external components (see diagram
Ke komponen eksternal (lihat diagram
)
)
Antenna terminal
Terminal antena
Ignition switch
Saklar kontak
Black
Hitam
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut
Yellow *2
Kuning *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)
Fuse block
Blok sekring
Red
Merah
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring
Blue
Biru
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
Biru dengan strip putih
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)
White with black stripe
Putih dengan strip hitam
Gray with black stripe
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam
Gray
Abu-abu
Green with black stripe
Hijau dengan strip hitam
Green
Hijau
Purple with black stripe
Ungu dengan strip hitam
Purple
Ungu
White
Putih
Left speaker (front)
Speaker kiri (depan)
Right speaker (front)
Speaker kanan (depan)
Left speaker (rear)
Speaker kiri (belakang)
Right speaker (rear)
Speaker kanan (belakang)
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari unit ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan,
selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
TROUBLESHOOTING
PEMECAHAN MASALAH
• The fuse blows.
• Sekring meledak.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?
• No sound from the speakers.
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?
• Sound is distorted.
• Suara terdistorsi.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan
tertebal?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
• Alat penerima ini menjadi panas.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / Penyambungan penguat eksternal atau subwoofer
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat
dikontrol melalui unit ini.
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari unit ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat. Biarkan
ujung speaker dari unit ini tidak digunakan.
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Remote lead
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)
Ujung jauh
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 22 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
Setel “L/O MODE ” ke “REAR” (Lihat halaman 22 dari
BUKU PETUNJUK.)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic
antenna if any
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis
jika ada
Rear speakers
Speaker-speaker belakang
JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page 22 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
Setel “L/O MODE ” ke “SUB.W” (Lihat halaman 22 dari
BUKU PETUNJUK.)
Front speakers
Speaker-speaker depan
or
atau
JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
C
Connecting the external components / Menyambung komponen eksternal
When connecting the external components, refer also to the manuals supplied for the components and
adapter.
Bila menghubungkan komponen eksternal, rujuk juga buku petunjuk yang dibekalkan untuk komponen
dan adaptor.
CAUTION:
Peringatan:
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
Sebelum menyambungkan komponen eksternal, pastikan bahwa alat penerima sudah dimatikan.
You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer jack.
Anda dapat menghubungkan komponen JVC berikut ini ke jack CD changer
JVC component
Model name
Komponen JVC
Nama model
CD changer (CD-CH)
CH-X1500, etc.
CD changer (CD-CH)
CH-X1500, etc.
You can also connect the following components through the various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
Anda juga dapat menghubungkan komponen berikut ini melalui berbagai adaptor JVC.
• Kabel koneksi mungkin harus dibeli secara terpisah.
Component
Adapter
Model name
Komponen
Adaptor
Nama model
Bluetooth device
Bluetooth adapter
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57
Perangkat Bluetooth
Adaptor Bluetooth
KS-BTA200
iPod
Interface adapter for iPod
Line input adapter
iPod
Adaptor interface untuk iPod KS-PD100
Portable audio player with line output jacks
Audio player portabel dengan jack line output
Adaptor line input
KS-U57
KS-U58
Portable
audio
player
with
3.5
mm
stereo
mini
jackAUX
input
adapter
KS-U58
Audio player portabel dengan jack stereo mini 3.5 mm Adaptor AUX input
When connecting more than one component (maximum: two), it is recommended that you connect the
components in series as explained below.
Bila menghubungkan beberapa komponen (maksimum: dua), dianjurkan agar Anda menghubungkan
komponen dalam rangkaian seperti dijelaskan di bawah.
When connecting two components in series /
Bila menghubungkan dua komponen dalam rangkaian
To disconnect the connector / Untuk memutuskan konektor
4
*
Hold the connector tightly (1), then pull it out (2) .
Pegang erat konektor (1) lalu tarik keluar (2).
CD changer jack / Konector CD changer
A
KS-BTA200
B*4 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58
iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Inc., terdaftar di Amerika Serikat dan di negara-negara lain.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
*
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan
kerusakan pada unit tersebut.
Untuk menggunakan komponen ini, lakukan pengaturan masukan eksternal yang benar (lihat PETUNJUK di
halaman 22).
4
*
4
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD RECEIVER
KD-R406/KD-R405
KD-R406/KD-R405
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0571-005A
[UT]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
[European Union only]
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to
avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of
the output level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
How to reset your unit
CONTENTS
OPERATIONS
Basic operations...........................................
• Using the control panel...............................
• Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)......
Preparation..................................................
Listening to the radio...................................
Disc operations.............................................
4
4
5
7
8
9
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased (except the
registered Bluetooth device, see page 10).
EXTERNAL DEVICES
How to forcibly eject a disc
Using the Bluetooth® devices....................... 10
• Using the Bluetooth cellular phone ............ 12
• Using the Bluetooth audio player ............... 13
Listening to the CD changer ......................... 14
Listening to the iPod.................................... 15
Listening to the other external
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
components.............................................. 16
Detaching the control panel
Attaching the control panel
SETTINGS
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 17
Title assignment .......................................... 18
Bluetooth settings ....................................... 19
Menu operations.......................................... 20
Color settings............................................... 23
REFERENCES
More about this unit .................................... 24
Troubleshooting........................................... 27
Maintenance................................................ 31
Specifications............................................... 32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Basic operations
Using the control panel
1
• FM/AM: Select preset station.
• CD/CD-CH: Select folder.
• IPOD: Enter the main menu/Pause playback/
Confirm selection.
• BT-PHONE/BT-AUDIO: Enter/go back to
previous Bluetooth menu.
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).
• Turn off the power [Hold].
Select the source.
FM = AM*1 = CD*2 = CD-CH*2/IPOD*2 (or
EXT INPUT) = BT-PHONE*2 = BT-AUDIO*2 =
AUX IN*1 = (back to the beginning)
• Enter list operations.
8
9
p
q
w
Eject disc.
Select the sound mode.
Detach the panel.
Change the display information.
• FM/AM: Search for station.
• CD/CD-CH: Select track.
• IPOD: Select track.
• BT-PHONE/BT-AUDIO: Select setting item/
registered device.
2
3
e
r
t
Return to the previous menu.
Remote sensor
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
4
5
1
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 22).
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready
or not connected.
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*3
• Confirm the selection [Press].*3
• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*3
• CD/CD-CH/IPOD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*3
Loading slot
2
*
3
*
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.
6
7
Display window
You can change the display and button illumination (see “COLOR” on page 21).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Display window
1
2
3
Bluetooth indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Status of Bluetooth device
(Device number, [P: 1 – 5]; signal strength,
6
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,
ROCK, POPS, USER
EQ (equalizer) indicator
7
8
9
LOUD (loudness) indicator
[
: 0 – 3]*; battery reminder, [ : 0 – 3]*)
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
Main display
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),
MO (monaural)
* As the number increases, the signal/battery power
becomes stronger.
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Time countdown indicator
p
q
4
5
Playback source indicators—CH (CD changer), DISC
w
Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Caution:
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire, or the like.
Remote sensor
If the effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace the battery.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS
5
6
7
For Bluetooth cellular phone:
– Answers calls if pressed briefly.
– Rejects calls if pressed and held.
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
• Reverse skip/forward skip for Bluetooth audio.
1
2
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
• Changes the preset stations.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.
• While playing an MP3 disc on an
MP3-compatible CD changer:
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.
• While listening to an Apple iPod:
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such
as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long
time.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot
reach.
• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,
or dispose of it in a fire.
• Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
3
4
5
Adjusts the volume level.
Selects the sound mode.
Selects the source.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Preparation
Cancel the display demonstration and set the clock
• See also page 20.
Turn on the power.
1
Cancel the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2
Set the clock
Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust
the minute.
[Turn] = [Press]
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
When the power is turned off: Check the current clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to
“CLOCK OFF,” (see page 20)
When the power is turned on: Change the display information of the current source
FM/AM
Station name*1 = Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)
CD/CD-CH
Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*2 = Track title*2 = Current track number with the
elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time = (back
to the beginning)
MP3/WMA:
Album name/performer (folder name)*3 = Track title (file name)*3 =
Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
IPOD
Folder name = Track name = Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current
track number with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
1
*
*
*
If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 18.
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 20),
folder name and file name appear.
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS
7
Listening to the radio
Select “FM” or “AM.”
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,
then press it repeatedly.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”
lights up on the display.
When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
• See also page 21.
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
1
While listening to a station...
[Turn] = [Press]
2
Select the preset number range you want to
store.
Select “TUNER” = “MONO”
= “MONO ON”
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• “MO” lights up on the display.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator
goes off.
3
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically.
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations
3
for AM.
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset
number “04.”
Selecting preset station
1
or
2
Select preset number “04.”
[Turn] = [Press]
Disc operations
Turn on the power.
Insert a disc.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change
the source or eject the disc.
1
2
Stop playing and ejecting the disc
Selecting a track/folder
• “NO DISC” appears.
Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Prohibiting disc ejection
[Turn] = [Press]
• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder, then
the desired track by performing the control dial.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS
9
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you
to...
Using the Bluetooth®
devices
MP3/WMA: Select folder
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect
the Bluetooth adapter (KS-BTA200) (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this
unit.
[Press]Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to check
the countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
To use a Bluetooth device through the unit
(“BT-PHONE” and “BT-AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
2
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
[Turn] = [Press]
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“BT-PHONE” and “BT-AUDIO”).
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Registering a Bluetooth device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Use either of the following items in the Bluetooth menu
to register and establish the connection with a device.
• Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO” as the source to
operate the Bluetooth menu.
REPEAT
TRACK RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
FOLDER RPT
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder
RANDOM
OPEN
Make the unit ready to establish a new
Bluetooth connection.
FOLDER RND
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all
tracks of current folder, then tracks
of next folders
Connection is established by operating the
Bluetooth device.
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
SEARCH Make the unit ready to establish a new
Bluetooth connection.
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Connection is established by operating
the unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES
Registering using “OPEN”
Preparation: Operate the device to turn on its
5
Use the Bluetooth device to search and
connect.
On the device to be connected, enter the same
PIN code you have just entered for this unit.
“CONNECTED” appears on the display.
Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.
Bluetooth function.
1
2
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
Select “NEW DEVICE.”
The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use “CONNECT“ (or activate
“AUTO CNNCT”) to connect the same device from
next time on. (See the following and page 19.)
3
4
Select “OPEN.”
Connecting a device
Perform steps 1 and 2 on left column, then...
1
• Select “SEARCH” to search for available
devices.
The unit searches and displays the list of the
available devices. If no available device is
detected, “UNFOUND” appears.
• Select “SPECIAL” to connect a special
device.
Enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number)
code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number). [Initial: 0000]
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
1
Move to the next (or previous) number
position.
2
3
Select a device you want to connect.
2
Select a number.
• For available devices...
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to the
unit.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering a PIN code.
Confirm the entry.
Use the Bluetooth device to connect.
Now connection is established and you can use
the device through the unit.
“OPEN..” flashes on the display.
• For special device...
Use “OPEN” or “SEARCH” to connect.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL DEVICES 11
3
• Select “CONNECT” or “DISCONNECT” to
connect/disconnect the selected device.
• Select “DELETE,” then “YES” to delete the
selected device.
Connecting/disconnecting/deleting a
registered device
1
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
2
Select a registered device you want to
connect/disconnect/delete.
You can set the unit to connect the Bluetooth device
automatically when the unit is turned on. (See
“AUTO CNNCT” on page 19.)
Using the Bluetooth cellular phone
Select “BT-PHONE.”
1
2
Enter the Bluetooth menu.
Make a call or setting using the Bluetooth setting menu.
(See the following and page 19.)
3
—
When a call comes in....
When a text message comes in....
The source is automatically changed to “BT-PHONE.”
• The display will flash in blue (see “RING COLOR”
on page 21 for setting.)
If the cellular phone is compatible with text message
(notified through JVC Bluetooth adapter) and “MSG
INFO” (message info) is set to “AUTO” (see page 19), the
unit rings to inform you of the message arrival.
• “RCV MESSAGE” (receiving message) appears on
the display and the display illuminate in blue (see
“RING COLOR” on page 21 for setting).
When “AUTO ANSWER” is activated....
The unit answers the incoming calls automatically, see
page 19.
• When “AUTO ANSWER” is deactivated, press any
button (except
incoming call.
/
/0) to answer the
Making a call
• You can adjust the microphone volume level (see
page 19).
You can make a call using the following methods.
Select “BT-PHONE,” then follow the following steps to
make a call:
To end the call
Hold any button (except
/
/0).
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
1
Enter the “DIAL” menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
2
Speak the name you want to call.
• If your cellular phone does not support the
voice recognition system, “ERROR” appears
on the display.
• Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy
environment or during an emergency.
2
Select a calling method.
Call history:
1
Select a call history (REDIAL*, RECEIVED*,
MISSED*).
2
Then select a name (if it is acquired) or phone
number.
Using the Bluetooth audio
player
Select “BT-AUDIO.”
If playback does not start, operate
the Bluetooth audio player to start
playback.
Phone book:
1
Select “PHONE BOOK*”.
• Operate the Bluetooth audio
player to pause (if playback does
not pause when you change the
source).
The list of phone number appears.
Select a name from the list.
2
Direct dialing:
Reverse skip/forward skip
1
Select “NUMBER.”
Pause/start playback*
* Operation may be different
according to the connected
Bluetooth audio player.
2
Enter the phone number.
Enter setting menu (Device list)
• Refer also to page 12 for connecting/disconnecting/
deleting a registered device.
Bluetooth Information:
* Displays only when your cellular phone is equipped
with these functions and is compatible with this unit.
If you wish to receive more information about
Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English
website only)
Voice dialing:
1
Select “VOICE DIAL.”
“SAY NAME” appears on the display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL DEVICES 13
Listening to the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer (separately purchased) with your unit. You can connect
a CD changer to the CD changer jack on the rear of the unit.
• You can only play conventional CDs (including CD Text) and MP3 discs.
Preparation: Make sure “CH / IPOD” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 22.
Select “CD-CH.”
1
2
Enter the list mode.
Select a disc, folder, then the track.
Playback starts automatically.
• If there is no disc on the selected tray, the unit beeps.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
• To select a desired folder/track to start playback (for MP3 discs), repeat step 2 and 3 above until the desired
folder/track is selected. The selection always start from disc number first.
MP3: Select folders
REPEAT
TRACK RPT
FOLDER RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
MP3: Repeats all tracks of current
folder
[Press] Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
DISC RPT
:
Repeats all tracks of the current
disc
RANDOM
Selecting the playback modes
FOLDER RND
:
MP3: Randomly plays all tracks of
the current folder, then tracks of
the next folder
1
2
DISC RND
ALL RND
:
:
Randomly plays all tracks of current
disc
Randomly plays all tracks of the
discs in the magazine
[Turn] = [Press]
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Listening to the iPod
Before operating, connect the Interface adapter for iPod, KS-PD100 (separately purchased) to the CD changer
jack on the rear of the unit.
Preparation: Make sure “CH / IPOD” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 22.
Select “IPOD.”
1
2
Select a song.
Playback starts automatically.
Selecting a track from the menu
Selecting the playback modes
1
2
Enter the main menu.
1
2
This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about 5 seconds.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select the desired menu.
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
PLAYLISTS Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSERS Ô (back
to the beginning)
REPEAT
ONE RPT
:
:
Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod.
3
Confirm the selection.
ALL RPT
Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod.
RANDOM
• To return to the previous menu, press 5.
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
ALBUM RND*
:
:
Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
SONG RND
Functions the same as “Shuffle
Songs” of the iPod.
Pause playback
• To resume playback, press the button
again.
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
[Press] Select tracks
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of the
main “MENU.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL DEVICES 15
Listening to the other external components
You can connect an external component to:
• CD changer jack on the rear of this unit using the following adapters:
–Line Input Adapter, KS-U57 (separately purchsed)
–AUX Input Adapter, KS-U58 (separately purchsed)
Preparation: Make sure “EXT INPUT” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 22.
• AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 22.
Select “EXT INPUT” or “AUX IN.”
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
Adjust the volume.
—
2
3
Adjust the sound as you want (see pages 17 and 18).
—
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack
Portable audio player, etc.
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 EXTERNAL DEVICES
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
• See also page 20 (“EQ”).
Selecting from Menu.
or
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ”
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset value
Sound
BASS
MIDDLE
Freq. Level
TREBLE
LOUD
mode
(loudness)
Freq. Level
Q
Q
Freq. Level
Q
USER
60 Hz
100 Hz
80 Hz
00 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+01 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+02 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+04 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
00 Q1.0 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
+01 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
–02 Q1.0 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25
ROCK
+02 Q1.25
+03 Q1.25
+02 Q1.25
+01 Q1.25
+03 Q1.25
CLASSIC
POPS
OFF
100 Hz
60 Hz
HIP HOP
JAZZ
80 Hz
Freq.: Frequency Q: Q-slope
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETTINGS 17
3
4
Select a tone.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and
[Turn] = [Press]
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
1
2
Select “FM” or “AM.”
Adjust the sound elements of the selected
tone.
Show the title entry screen.
[Turn] = [Press]
1
2
3
Adjust the frequency.
Adjust the level.
Adjust the Q-slope.
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character.
Range/selectable items
BASS MIDDLE TREBLE
Sound
elements
Frequency
60 Hz
80 Hz
500 Hz 7.5 kHz
1.0 kHz 10.0 kHz
100 Hz 1.5 kHz 12.5 kHz
120 Hz 2.5 kHz 15.0 kHz
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
Level
Q
–06 to –06 to –06 to
+06
+06
+06
Q0.5
Q1.0
Q1.5
Q2.0
Q0.75
Q1.0
Q1.25
Q1.5
Q0.75
Q1.25
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering the title.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other sound
characteristics.
4
Finish the procedure.
The adjustment made will be stored automatically.
To erase the entire title
In step 2 above...
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Bluetooth settings
You can change the settings listed on the right column
according to your preference.
Setting menu ( : Initial)
AUTO CNNCT (connect)
When the unit is turned on, the connection is
established automatically with...
1
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
Enter the Bluetooth menu.
OFF:
No Bluetooth device.
2
LAST: The last connected Bluetooth device.
ORDER: The available registered Bluetooth device
found at first.
AUTO ANSWER
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
3
4
Select “SETTINGS.”
ON:
The unit answers the incoming calls
automatically.
OFF:
The unit does not answer the calls
automatically. Answer the calls manually.
Select a setting item.
REJECT: The unit rejects all incoming calls.
MSG INFO (message info)
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
AUTOMATIC: The unit informs you of the arrival of
a message by ringing and displaying
“RCV MESSAGE” (receiving message).
• The display illuminate in blue (see
“RING COLOR” on page 21).
1
*
*
Appears only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected.
Appears only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected and it is compatible with text message
(notified through JVC Bluetooth adapter).
Bluetooth Audio: Shows only “Version.”
2
3
MANUAL: The unit does not inform you of the
arrival of a message.
*
MIC SETTING (microphone setting)
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth
adapter, [LEVEL 01/02/03].
5
Change the setting accordingly.
VERSION
The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are
shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETTINGS 19
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].
Cancels.
demonstration • DEMO OFF
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON
Clock display
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].
[Initial: 1:00]
EQ
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Equalizer
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
TAG DISPLAY
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
MONO*3
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo
effect will be lost, [8].
• MONO OFF
• AUTO
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.
IF BAND
Intermediate
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
frequency band • WIDE
:
COLOR 01
– COLOR 29,
USER
:
Select one of the preset or user color for display and button (except EQ/
/0) illumination.
(See also page 23 for USER color setting.)
MENU COLOR
Menu color
• OFF
• ON
:
:
Cancels.
Changes the display and button (except EQ/
/0)
illumination during menu, list search and playback mode
operations.
RING COLOR*4 • OFF
:
:
Cancels.
Ring color
• ON
When a call comes in, the display will flash in blue.
• The display will change to the original color when the call is
answered or the incoming call stops.
When the unit receive a text message, the display only
illuminate in blue.
FADER*5
Fader
BALANCE*6
Balance
R06 – F06
L06 – R06
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced
sound at a low volume level.
VOL ADJUST
Volume adjust
VOL ADJ –05
—
:
Preset the volume adjustment level of each source (except
FM), compared to the FM volume level. The volume level will
VOL ADJ +05 automatically increase or decrease when you change the source.
[Initial:
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you want to
VOL ADJ 00]
adjust.
• “VOL ADJ FIX” appears on the display if “FM” is selected as the
source.
3
4
5
6
*
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
Displayed only when Bluetooth adapter, KS-BTA200 is connected.
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETTINGS 21
Category Menu items
L/O MODE
Selectable settings, [reference page]
• SUB.W
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting
a subwoofer (through an external amplifier).
Line output mode
• REAR
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting
the speakers (through an external amplifier).
SUB.W FREQ*7 • LOW
Subwoofer cutoff • MID
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 72 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 111 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 157 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
frequency
• HIGH
SUB.W LEVEL*7 SUB.W 00
Subwoofer level — SUB.W 08
:
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
[Initial: SUB.W 04]
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*8
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
AM*9
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].
EXT IN*10
External input
• CH / IPOD
• EXT INPUT
:
:
To use a JVC CD changer, [14], or an Apple iPod, [15].
To connect portable audio player to the CD changer jack, [16].
AUX IN*11
Auxiliary input
• AUX OFF
• AUX ON
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].
7
8
*
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, Bluetooth, or AUX IN.
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
9
*
*
*
10
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Color settings
Creating your own color
—USER Color
You can create your own colors—“DAY COLOR” or
“NIGHT COLOR.”
DAY COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER OFF.”
NIGHT COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER ON.”
5
6
Select a primary color.
[Turn] = [Press]
Adjust the level (00 to 31) of the selected
primary color.
1
[Turn] = [Press]
2
3
4
Select “COLOR” = “USER.”
[Turn] = [Press]
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust other primary
colors.
Exit from the setting.
While “USER” is shown on the display...
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETTINGS 23
More about this unit
Basic operations
Disc operations
Turning on the power
Caution for DualDisc playback
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
General
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA
formats.
General
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as
those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD
(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
Bluetooth operations
General
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on the
circumstances around you.
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• ERROR CNNCT (Error Connection):
The device is registered but the connection has failed.
Use “CONNECT” to connect the device again. (See
page 12.)
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REFERENCES 25
• ERROR
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
Try the operation again. If “ERROR” appears again,
check if the device supports the function you have
tried.
• UNFOUND
No available Bluetooth device is detected by
“SEARCH.”
• LOADING
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• If the text information includes more than 11
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can
display up to 40 characters.
The unit is updating the phone book*.
* Displays only when your cellular phone is equipped
with these functions and is compatible with this unit.
• PLEASE WAIT
The unit is preparing to use the Bluetooth function. If
the message does not disappear, turn off and turn on
the unit, then connect the device again (or reset the
unit).
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc.
co.jp/english/car/> (English website only)
• RESET 8
Check the connection between the adapter and this
unit.
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
iPod
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
Menu operations
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
– iPod photo
– iPod nano*1
– iPod video (5th Generation)*2
– iPod classic 2007*2
– iPod nano (3rd Generation)*2
1
*
When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu.
2
*
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 22).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 22).
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REFERENCES 27
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit. The unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio device at a time.
While connecting a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected
device and search again.
• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select “OPEN” on the unit to connect
the device. (See page 11.)
* For Bluetooth operations, refer also to the instructions supplied with the Bluetooth Adapter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device.
• Select the device name from “SPECIAL,” then try to
connect again. (See page 11.)
• Try to pair/connect from the Bluetooth device.
• Echo or noise occurs.
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Phone sound quality is poor.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the
Bluetooth cellular phone.
• Move the car to a place where you can get a better
signal reception.
• The sound is interrupted or skipped during • Reduce the distance between the unit and the
playback of a Bluetooth audio device.
Bluetooth audio device.
• Disconnect the device connected for “BT-PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the
device again.
• The connected audio device cannot be
controlled.
Check whether the connected audio device supports
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “NO MAGAZINE” appears on the display.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
• The CD changer does not work at all.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REFERENCES 29
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work. • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
• The sound is distorted.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
• “NO IPOD” appears on the display.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Charge the battery.
• Playback stops.
The headphones are disconnected during playback.
Restart the playback operation (see page 15).
• No sound can be heard when connecting
an iPod nano.
• Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod.
Then, connect it again.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Victor
Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REFERENCES 31
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz)
Q0.5, Q1.0, Q1.5, Q2.0
Middle:
Treble:
12 dB (500 Hz, 1.0 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz)
Q0.75, Q1.0, Q1.25, Q1.5
12 dB (7.5 kHz, 10.0 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
15.0 kHz)
Q0.75, Q1.25
Frequency Response:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, CD changer jack,
Antenna input
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
AM:
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
AM Tuner
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
96 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
Panel Size:
Mass:
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REFERENCES 33
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN, CT
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0808DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-R406/KD-R405
Installation/Connection Manual
安裝/連接手冊
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, CT
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0571-010A
[UT]
中文
ENGLISH
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源
壓變換器，可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。
系統，則需要 一個電
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
WARNINGS
警告
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
為防止短路，建議在安裝本機之前
，拔開電池的負極，並把所有電路都連接好。
• 安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
注意：
Notes:
•
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞，請向
• 後置和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W，其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W，
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值，以防止揚聲器損壞。（參閱使用說明書的第 22 頁。）
• 為防止電源短路，請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
置
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• 本機使用後，散熱片會很熱。因此，在移出本機時，小心不要 觸摸散熱片。
Heat sink / 散熱片
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項：
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
• 切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池，否則本機將會嚴重損壞。
will be seriously damaged.
• 在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前
，檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
用於安裝和連接的零件清單
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏，立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case/Control panel
Sleeve
外套機殼
Trim plate
裝飾框
Power cord
電路連接用的配線束
硬盒／控制面
板
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)
墊圈（ø5）
Lock nut (M5)
鎖定螺母（M5）
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
螺栓（M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm）
Rubber cushion
緊固
橡膠防震墊
J
K
L
Handles
板條型把手
Remote controller
遙控器
Battery
電池
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
安裝（裝設、固定在儀表板內）
下面
的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題，或需要 有關配套元件的資料，請向 JVC
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。
• 如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機，應請合格的技術人員來安裝。
Do the required electrical connections.
進行所需的電路連接。
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
弄彎機殼的突舌，把外套機殼牢固
在儀表板內。
Removing the unit
拆卸本機
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
在拆卸本機前，應將本機後部的固定和連接部分鬆開。
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
按圖所示，將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽，然
後輕穩地從兩側向
外拉兩片把手，本機隨
之拉出。
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
以豐田牌（TOYOTA）汽車為例：首先取出汽車收音機，然後將本機裝入其空出的位置
。
Stay (option)
支撐架（選用的）
Fire wall
防火板
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘（M5 × 8 mm）*2
Dashboard
儀表板
Bracket*2
托座*2
Screw (option)
螺絲釘（選用的）
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘（M5 × 8 mm）*2
Pocket
空殼
Bracket*2
托座*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度
。
注意
：把本機安裝在托座上時，務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘，會損壞本機。
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
您豎起本機時，小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。
不隨本機提供。
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
中文
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
電路連接
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
接線前：仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。
電源線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源
線的顏色導線。
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
2 將天線的電線連接起來。
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 最後，把配線束的插頭插在本機上。
Rear line out (see diagram
輸出端子（參閱圖表
)
Rear ground terminal
本機後背接地端子
）
15 A fuse
15 A 保險
絲
To external components (see diagram
)
Antenna terminal
接至外接裝置（參閱圖表
）
天線端子
Ignition switch
點火開關
Black
黑色
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
接至金屬體或汽車底盤
Yellow *2
黃色 *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
接至保險 絲單元內的帶電端子，保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接
（用於旁路點火開關）（恆定 12 V）
Fuse block
保險 絲單元
Red
紅色
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子
Blue
藍色
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
接至自動天線（若有裝設）（最大 250 mA）
Blue with white stripe
藍色帶有白色條紋
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線（最大 200 mA）
White with black stripe
白色帶有黑色條紋
Gray with black stripe
灰色帶有黑色條紋
Gray
灰色
Green with black stripe
綠色帶有黑色條紋
Green
綠色
Purple with black stripe
紫色帶有黑色條紋
Purple
紫色
White
白色
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
右揚聲器（後置
左揚聲器（前
置
）
右揚聲器（前
置
）
左揚聲器（後置
）
）
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
不隨本機提供。
本機未安裝時，進行工作狀況
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
檢查之前
，必須把這導線接上，否則
不能開啟電源
。
TROUBLESHOOTING
故障排除
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• 保險絲燒斷。
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確？
• 電源不能接通。
• Power cannot be turned on.
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上？
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• 揚聲器沒有聲音。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路？
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• 聲音失真。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地？
* 檢查揚聲器的左（L）、右（R）端子的負極“–”是否共同接地？
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 噪音干擾音響。
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚
的電線連接？
• 本機發熱。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地？
• This unit becomes hot.
* 檢查揚聲器的左（L）、右（R）端子的負極“–”是否共同接地？
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 本機完全不能操作。
* 您是否已經重
置您的機組？
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer/ 連接至外接功率放大器或重低音揚聲器
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊
將遙控導線（藍色帶有白色條紋）和其他裝置上的遙控導線連接起來，以便可以從本機進行
遙控。
• 將揚聲器和本機拔開，再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。
車的音響系統。
•
Remote lead
遙控導線
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-型連接導線（不隨本機提供）
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
遙控導線（藍色帶有白色條紋）
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 22 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
將“L/O MODE”設定為“REAR”（參閱使用說明書的第
22 頁。）
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic
antenna if any
連接至其他裝置
上的遙控導線或自動天線（若有
裝設）
JVC Amplifier
JVC 功率放大器
Rear speakers
後置揚聲器
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
信號導線（不隨本機提供）
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page 22 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
Front speakers
揚聲器
將“L/O MODE”設定為“SUB.W”（參閱使用說明書的第
22 頁。）
前
置
or
或
JVC Amplifier
JVC 功率放大器
Subwoofer
低音揚聲器
重
C
Connecting the external components / 連接其他外接裝置
When connecting the external components, refer also to the manuals supplied for the components and
adapter.
當連接外接裝置時，另參考隨裝置和轉換器附帶的使用手冊。
CAUTION:
小心：
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
連接外接裝置之前，先確定本機已經關閉。
You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer jack.
您可以連接以下 JVC 裝置至 CD 換碟器插孔。
JVC component
Model name
型號名稱
JVC 裝置
CD changer (CD-CH)
CH-X1500, etc.
CD 換碟器（CD-CH）
CH-X1500 等
You can also connect the following components through the various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
您也可以從不同的 JVC 轉換器連接以下裝置
• 連接導線可能需要 另購。
。
Component
Adapter
Model name
裝置
轉換器
Bluetooth 轉換器
型號名稱
KS-BTA200
Bluetooth device
Bluetooth adapter
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57
Bluetooth 裝置
iPod 端子轉換器
iPod KS-PD100
帶有線性 線性輸入轉換器
KS-U57
帶有 3.5 mm 立體聲迷你型插孔的手提式音頻播放機 AUX 輸入轉換器
iPod
Interface adapter for iPod
Line input adapter
Portable audio player with line output jacks
輸出插孔的手提式音頻播放機
Portable audio player with 3.5 mm stereo mini jack AUX input adapter
KS-U58
KS-U58
When connecting more than one component (maximum: two), it is recommended that you connect the
components in series as explained below.
當連接不止一件裝置
（最多：兩件）時，建議您按以下方法串聯裝置
。
When connecting two components in series / 當串聯兩件外接裝置時
To disconnect the connector / 想要拔開連接器
4
*
Hold the connector tightly (1), then pull it out (2) .
緊按連接器（1），再將其拔出（2）。
CD changer jack / CD 換碟器插孔
A
KS-BTA200
B*4 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod 是 Apple Inc.（蘋果公司）在美國及其他國家註冊的商標。
3
3
4
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
*
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接，連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋（如果已塗上油漆，在連接電
線前，將油漆刮去）。如果不這樣做，可能會損壞本機。
4
*
想要 使用這些裝置，正確設定外部輸入設定（參閱使用說明書的第 22 頁）。
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD RECEIVER
KD-S26
KD-S26
RECEPTOR CON CD
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 4.
Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 4.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.
For customer Use:
Enter below the Model
No. and Serial No. which
are located on the top or
bottom of the cabinet. Retain
this information for future
reference.
INSTRUCTIONS
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
Model No.
Serial No.
GET0642-001A
[J]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: (For U.S.A.) Visible and/or invisible class II laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam.
(For Canada) Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with
optical instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
[European Union only]
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Warning:
Temperature inside the car...
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to reset your unit
CONTENTS
How to reset your unit .................................
How to forcibly eject a disc...........................
Attaching the control panel .........................
Detaching the control panel.........................
Canceling the display demonstration...........
Setting the clock ..........................................
3
3
3
3
4
4
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased (except the
registered Bluetooth device, see page 10).
OPERATIONS
Basic operations...........................................
• Using the control panel...............................
• Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)......
Listening to the radio...................................
Disc operations.............................................
5
5
6
8
9
How to forcibly eject a disc
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
EXTERNAL DEVICES
Using the Bluetooth® devices....................... 10
• Using the Bluetooth cellular phone ............ 12
• Using the Bluetooth audio player ............... 13
Listening to the HD Radio™ Broadcast ......... 14
Listening to the CD changer ......................... 15
Listening to the satellite radio ..................... 16
Listening to the iPod.................................... 18
Listening to the other external
Attaching the control panel
components.............................................. 19
Detaching the control panel
SETTINGS
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 20
Title assignment .......................................... 21
Bluetooth settings ....................................... 22
Menu operations.......................................... 23
Color settings............................................... 26
REFERENCES
Caution on volume setting:
More about this unit .................................... 27
Troubleshooting........................................... 30
Maintenance................................................ 35
Specifications............................................... 36
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to
avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of
the output level.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canceling the display demonstration
1 Turn on the power.
4
Select “DEMO OFF.”
2
3
5
6
(Initial setting)
Finish the procedure.
Setting the clock
1 Turn on the power.
2
(Initial setting)
3
4
5
6
Select “CLOCK.”
Select “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour.
Adjust the minute.
7
Finish the procedure.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operations
Using the control panel
1
• FM/AM: Select preset station.
• HD RADIO: Select channel.
p
q
Detach the panel.
When the power is turned off: Check the current
clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to
“CLOCK OFF,” (see page 23).
When the power is turned on: Change the display
information of the current source.
• FM/AM/HD RADIO/SIRIUS/XM: Search for
station/channel.
• SIRIUS/XM: Select category.
• CD/CD-CH: Select folder.
• IPOD: Enter the main menu/Pause playback/
Confirm selection.
• BT-PHONE/BT-AUDIO: Enter/go back to
previous Bluetooth menu.
w
2
3
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).
• Turn off the power [Hold].
• CD/CD-CH: Select track.
• IPOD: Select track.
• BT-PHONE/BT-AUDIO: Select setting item/
registered device.
Select the source.
FM/HD RADIO FM*1 = AM/HD RADIO AM*1, *2
= SIRIUS*3/XM*3 = CD*3 = CD-CH*3/
IPOD*3 (or EXT INPUT) = BT-PHONE*3 = BT-
AUDIO*3 = AUX IN*2 = (back to the beginning)
• Enter list operations.
e
r
t
Return to the previous menu.
Remote sensor
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
1
4
5
*
When the HD Radio tuner box is connected, the
built-in tuner of this unit will be disabled. To listen
to the HD Radio broadcast, refer to “Listening to the
radio” on page 8. For more features, see page 14.
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 26).
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready
or not connected.
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*4
• Confirm the selection [Press].*4
• FM/HD Radio: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*4
• CD/CD-CH/IPOD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*4
Loading slot
2
*
3
6
7
8
9
*
Display window
Eject disc.
Select the sound mode.
4
*
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.
You can change the display and button illumination (see “COLOR” on page 24).
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcOh PAnEdRDAoTwIOnloNaSd.
5
Display window
1
2
3
Bluetooth indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Status of Bluetooth device
(Device number, [P: 1 – 5]; signal strength,
7
8
9
p
HD (HD Radio) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
LOUD (loudness) indicator
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
Main display
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
HOLD indicator
[
: 0 – 3]*; battery reminder, [ : 0 – 3]*)
* As the number increases, the signal/battery power
becomes stronger.
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Time countdown indicator
Playback source indicators—CH (CD changer), DISC
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,
ROCK, POPS, USER
q
w
4
e
r
5
6
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),
MO (monaural)
Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)
Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)
For USA-California Only:
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery
which contains Perchlorate Material—special
handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Caution:
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire, or the like.
If the effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace the battery.
Remote sensor
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to the satellite radio:
– Changes the channels if pressed briefly.
– Changes the channels rapidly if pressed and
held.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
• Reverse skip/forward skip for Bluetooth audio.
1
2
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
• Changes the tuner/HD Radio preset stations.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.
• While playing an MP3 disc on an
MP3-compatible CD changer:
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.
• While listening to the satellite (SIRIUS or XM)
radio:
Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such
as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long
time.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot
reach.
• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,
or dispose of it in a fire.
• Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
– Changes the categories.
• While listening to an Apple iPod:
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
3
4
5
6
Adjusts the volume level.
Selects the sound mode.
Selects the source.
For Bluetooth cellular phone:
– Answers calls if pressed briefly.
– Rejects calls if pressed and held.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcOh PAnEdRDAoTwIOnloNaSd.
7
Listening to the radio
Select “FM” or “AM.”
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,
then press it repeatedly.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”
lights up on the display.
When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
• See also page 24.
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
1
While listening to a station...
[Turn] = [Press]
2
Select the preset number range you want to
store.
Select “TUNER” = “MONO”
= “MONO ON”
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• “MO” lights up on the display.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator
goes off.
3
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically.
• If an HD Radio tuner box is connected, you can also
search and store the AM stations.
Change the display information
Station name* = Frequency = Clock = (back to
the beginning)
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
* If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME”
appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 21.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations
3
for AM.
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset
number “04.”
Selecting preset station
1
or
2
Select preset number “04.”
[Turn] = [Press]
Disc operations
Turn on the power.
Insert a disc.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change
the source or eject the disc.
1
2
Stop playing and ejecting the disc
Change the display information
• “NO DISC” appears. Press SRC to listen to
another playback source.
Audio CD/CD Text:
Prohibiting disc ejection
Disc title/performer*1 = Track title*1 = Current
track number with the elapsed playing time =
Current track number with the clock time = (back
to the beginning)
MP3/WMA:
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
Album name/performer (folder name)*2 = Track
title (file name)*2 = Current track number with
the elapsed playing time = Current track number
procedure.
Selecting a track/folder
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
1
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME”
appears.
[Turn] = [Press]
2
*
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information
or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see
page 24), folder name and file name appear.
• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder, then
the desired track by performing the control dial.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcOh PAnEdRDAoTwIOnloNaSd.
9
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you
to...
Using the Bluetooth®
devices
MP3/WMA: Select folder
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect
the Bluetooth adapter (KS-BTA200) (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this
unit.
[Press]Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to check
the countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
To use a Bluetooth device through the unit
(“BT-PHONE” and “BT-AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
2
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
[Turn] = [Press]
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“BT-PHONE” and “BT-AUDIO”).
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Registering a Bluetooth device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Use either of the following items in the Bluetooth menu
to register and establish the connection with a device.
• Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO” as the source to
operate the Bluetooth menu.
REPEAT
TRACK RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
FOLDER RPT
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder
RANDOM
OPEN
Make the unit ready to establish a new
Bluetooth connection.
FOLDER RND
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all
tracks of current folder, then tracks
of next folders
Connection is established by operating the
Bluetooth device.
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
SEARCH Make the unit ready to establish a new
Bluetooth connection.
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Connection is established by operating
the unit.
10 ODPoEwRnAloTadIOfrNomS W&wEwX.TSoEmRaNnAuaLlsD.cEomV.ICAEllSManuals Search And Download.
Registering using “OPEN”
Preparation: Operate the device to turn on its
5
Use the Bluetooth device to search and
connect.
On the device to be connected, enter the same
PIN code you have just entered for this unit.
“CONNECTED” appears on the display.
Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.
Bluetooth function.
1
2
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
Select “NEW DEVICE.”
The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use “CONNECT“ (or activate
“AUTO CNNCT”) to connect the same device from
next time on. (See the following and page 22.)
3
4
Select “OPEN.”
Connecting a device
Perform steps 1 and 2 on left column, then...
1
• Select “SEARCH” to search for available
devices.
The unit searches and displays the list of the
available devices. If no available device is
detected, “UNFOUND” appears.
• Select “SPECIAL” to connect a special
device.
Enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number)
code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number). [Initial: 0000]
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
1
Move to the next (or previous) number
position.
2
3
Select a device you want to connect.
2
Select a number.
• For available devices...
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to the
unit.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering a PIN code.
Confirm the entry.
Use the Bluetooth device to connect.
Now connection is established and you can use
the device through the unit.
“OPEN..” flashes on the display.
• For special device...
Use “OPEN” or “SEARCH” to connect.
Continued on the next page
EXTERNAL DEVICES 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
• Select “CONNECT” or “DISCONNECT” to
connect/disconnect the selected device.
• Select “DELETE,” then “YES” to delete the
selected device.
Connecting/disconnecting/deleting a
registered device
1
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
2
Select a registered device you want to
connect/disconnect/delete.
You can set the unit to connect the Bluetooth device
automatically when the unit is turned on. (See
“AUTO CNNCT” on page 22.)
Using the Bluetooth cellular phone
Select “BT-PHONE.”
1
2
Enter the Bluetooth menu.
Make a call or setting using the Bluetooth setting menu.
(See the following and page 22.)
3
—
When a call comes in....
When a text message comes in....
The source is automatically changed to “BT-PHONE.”
• The display will flash in blue (see “RING COLOR”
on page 24 for setting.)
If the cellular phone is compatible with text message
(notified through JVC Bluetooth adapter) and “MSG
INFO” (message info) is set to “AUTO” (see page 22), the
unit rings to inform you of the message arrival.
• “RCV MESSAGE” (receiving message) appears on
the display and the display illuminate in blue (see
“RING COLOR” on page 24 for setting).
When “AUTO ANSWER” is activated....
The unit answers the incoming calls automatically, see
page 22.
• When “AUTO ANSWER” is deactivated, press any
button (except
incoming call.
/
/0) to answer the
Making a call
• You can adjust the microphone volume level (see
page 22).
You can make a call using the following methods.
Select “BT-PHONE,” then follow the following steps to
make a call:
To end the call
Hold any button (except
/
/0).
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
1
Enter the “DIAL” menu.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Speak the name you want to call.
• If your cellular phone does not support the
voice recognition system, “ERROR” appears
on the display.
• Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy
environment or during an emergency.
2
Select a calling method.
Call history:
1
Select a call history (REDIAL*, RECEIVED*,
MISSED*).
2
Then select a name (if it is acquired) or phone
number.
Using the Bluetooth audio
player
Select “BT-AUDIO.”
If playback does not start, operate
the Bluetooth audio player to start
playback.
Phone book:
1
Select “PHONE BOOK*”.
• Operate the Bluetooth audio
player to pause (if playback does
not pause when you change the
source).
The list of phone number appears.
Select a name from the list.
2
Direct dialing:
Reverse skip/forward skip
1
Select “NUMBER.”
Pause/start playback*
* Operation may be different
according to the connected
Bluetooth audio player.
2
Enter the phone number.
Enter setting menu (Device list)
• Refer also to page 12 for connecting/disconnecting/
deleting a registered device.
Bluetooth Information:
* Displays only when your cellular phone is equipped
If you wish to receive more information about
Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English
website only)
with these functions and is compatible with this unit.
Voice dialing:
1
Select “VOICE DIAL.”
“SAY NAME” appears on the display.
EXTERNAL DEVICES 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the HD Radio™ Broadcast
Before operating, connect HD Radio tuner box,
KT-HD300 (separately purchased) to the CD changer
jack on the rear of the unit.
Searching for HD Radio stations
only
What is HD Radio Technology?
HD Radio Technology can deliver high-quality digital
sound—AM digital will have FM-like quality (in stereo)
and FM digital will have CD-like quality—with static-
free and clear reception. Furthermore, stations can offer
text and data, such as artist names and song titles.
• When the HD Radio tuner box is connected, it can also
receive conventional analog broadcasts.
• Many HD Radio stations also offer more than one
channel of programming. This service is called
multicasting.
Changing HD Radio reception mode
While receiving an HD Radio broadcast, the unit
receives digital or analog audio automatically due to
the receiving condition.
While listening to an HD Radio station...
• See also page 24.
[Turn] =
[Press]
• To find HD Radio stations in your area, visit
<http://www.hdradio.com/>.
Select “TUNER” = “BLEND HOLD” =
“AUTO”/”DIGITAL”/”ANALOG”
Refer also to pages 8 and 9 for basic radio
operations.
[Lights up] When holding the digital reception
[Flashes] When holding the analog reception
When receiving an HD Radio
station...
[Lights up] When digital audio is broadcast
[Flashes] When analog audio is broadcast
• If no sound can be heard with AUTO, change the
setting to ANALOG or DIGITAL.
• The setting automatically changes to AUTO if you
tuned in to or change to another station, or if you
turned off the power.
• This setting cannot take effect for the conventional
FM/AM stations.
Station Call Sign appears.
When receiving HD Radio multicast
channels...
• If the radio station forces the reception mode to
digital, the HOLD indicator flashes.
Change the display information
First four letters of Call Sign
Channel number
Call Sign*1 = Frequency = Title/artist/album name
of the current segment*2 = Clock = (back to the
Select your desired channel.
beginning)
1
*
“****-FM” or “****” appears when no Call Sign is
received.
2
*
“NO TEXT” appears when no text is received.
“LINKING” appears while linking to a multicast channel.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer (separately purchased) with your unit. You can connect
a CD changer to the CD changer jack on the rear of the unit.
• You can only play conventional CDs (including CD Text) and MP3 discs.
Preparation: Make sure “CH / IPOD” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 26.
Select “CD-CH.”
1
2
Enter the list mode.
Select a disc, folder, then the track.
Playback starts automatically.
• If there is no disc on the selected tray, the unit beeps.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
• To select a desired folder/track to start playback (for MP3 discs), repeat step 2 and 3 above until the desired
folder/track is selected. The selection always start from disc number first.
MP3: Select folders
REPEAT
TRACK RPT
FOLDER RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
MP3: Repeats all tracks of current
folder
[Press] Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
DISC RPT
:
Repeats all tracks of the current
disc
RANDOM
Selecting the playback modes
FOLDER RND
:
MP3: Randomly plays all tracks of
the current folder, then tracks of
the next folder
1
2
DISC RND
ALL RND
:
:
Randomly plays all tracks of current
disc
Randomly plays all tracks of the
discs in the magazine
[Turn] = [Press]
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
See page 9 for changing the display information.
EXTERNAL DEVICES 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the satellite radio
Before operating, connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of
this unit.
• JVC SIRIUS satellite radio System, SC-C1 and KS-SRA100, PnP, SC-VDOC1 and KS-SRA100, for listening to the
SIRIUS Satellite radio.
• XM satellite radio System, JVC Smart Digital Adapter–XMDJVC100, CNP2000UC and CNPJVC1 for listening to
the XM Satellite radio.
GCI (Global Control Information) update
• If channels are updated after subscription, updating starts automatically. “UPDATING” flashes and no sound can be
heard.
• Update takes a few minutes to complete.
• During update, you cannot operate your satellite radio.
Activate your SIRIUS subscription after
connection
1
Activate your XM subscription after
connection
• Only Channel 0, 1, and 247 are available before
activation.
2
1
SIRIUS Satellite radio starts updating all the SIRIUS
channels.
2
Once completed, SIRIUS Satellite radio tunes in to
the preset channel, CH184.
XMDirect™ Tuner Box or XMDirect2 Tuner System
starts updating all the XM channels. “Channel 1” is
tuned in automatically.
3
4
Check your SIRIUS ID, see page 24.
Contact SIRIUS on the internet at
3
4
Check your XM Satellite radio ID labelled
on the casing of the XMDirect™ Tuner Box
or XMDirect2 Tuner System, or tune in to
“Channel 0” (see page 17).
<http://activate.siriusradio.com/> to
activate your subscription, or you can call
SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).
“SUB UPDT PRESS ANY KEY” scrolls on the display
once subscription has been completed.
Contact XM Satellite radio on the internet
at <http://xmradio.com/activation/> to
activate your subscription, or you can call
1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).
Once completed, the unit tunes in to one of the
available channels (Channel 4 or higher).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select “SIRIUS” or “XM.”
1
2
Select a category.
SIRIUS: If you select “ALL,” you can tune in to all the channels of all categories.
Select a channel to listen.
3
• Holding the button changes the channels rapidly.
• While searching, invalid and unsubscribed channels are skipped.
XM: If you do not select a channel within 15 seconds, category selected in step 2
is canceled. You can select all channels of all categories now (including non-
categorised channels).
Checking the XM Satellite radio ID
While selecting “XM,” select “Channel 0.”
Storing channels in memory
You can preset up to 18 channels for both SIRIUS and
XM.
Ex.: Storing channel into preset number “04.”
1
Tune in to a channel you want to store (see
steps 1 – 3 above).
The display alternately shows “RADIO ID” and the
8-digit (alphanumeric) ID number.
2
Select preset number “04.”
To cancel the ID number display, select any channel
other than “Channel 0.”
Selecting SIRIUS/XM preset station
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Change the display information
Category name = Channel name = Artist name =
Composer name* = Song/program name/title =
Clock = (back to the beginning)
* Only for SIRIUS Satellite radio.
EXTERNAL DEVICES 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the iPod
Before operating, connect the Interface adapter for iPod, KS-PD100 (separately purchased) to the CD changer
jack on the rear of the unit.
Preparation: Make sure “CH / IPOD” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 26.
Select “IPOD.”
1
2
Select a song.
Playback starts automatically.
Selecting a track from the menu
Selecting the playback modes
1
2
Enter the main menu.
1
2
This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about 5 seconds.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select the desired menu.
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
PLAYLISTS Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSERS Ô (back
to the beginning)
REPEAT
ONE RPT
:
:
Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod.
3
Confirm the selection.
ALL RPT
Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod.
RANDOM
• To return to the previous menu, press 5.
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
ALBUM RND*
:
:
Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
SONG RND
Functions the same as “Shuffle
Songs” of the iPod.
Pause playback
• To resume playback, press the button
again.
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
[Press] Select tracks
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of the
main “MENU.”
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change the display information
Folder name = Track name = Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
Listening to the other external components
You can connect an external component to:
• CD changer jack on the rear of this unit using the following adapters:
–Line Input Adapter, KS-U57 (separately purchsed)
–AUX Input Adapter, KS-U58 (separately purchsed)
Preparation: Make sure “EXT INPUT” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “EXT IN” setting, see page 26.
• AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 26.
Select “EXT INPUT” or “AUX IN.”
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
Adjust the volume.
—
2
3
Adjust the sound as you want (see pages 20 and 21).
—
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack
Portable audio player, etc.
3.5 mm (3/16”) stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
EXTERNAL DEVICES 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
• See also page 23 (“EQ”).
Selecting from Menu.
or
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ”
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset value
Sound
BASS
MIDDLE
Freq. Level
TREBLE
LOUD
mode
(loudness)
Freq. Level
Q
Q
Freq. Level
Q
USER
60 Hz
100 Hz
80 Hz
00 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+01 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+02 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+04 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz
00 Q1.0 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
+01 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
–02 Q1.0 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz
00 Q1.25
ROCK
+02 Q1.25
+03 Q1.25
+02 Q1.25
+01 Q1.25
+03 Q1.25
CLASSIC
POPS
OFF
100 Hz
60 Hz
HIP HOP
JAZZ
80 Hz
Freq.: Frequency Q: Q-slope
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Select a tone.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
• When HD Radio tuner box is connected, this feature
will be disable.
[Turn] = [Press]
1
Select “FM” or “AM.”
Adjust the sound elements of the selected
tone.
2
Show the title entry screen.
[Turn] = [Press]
1
2
3
Adjust the frequency.
Adjust the level.
Adjust the Q-slope.
Range/selectable items
BASS MIDDLE TREBLE
Sound
elements
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character.
Frequency
60 Hz
80 Hz
500 Hz 7.5 kHz
1.0 kHz 10.0 kHz
100 Hz 1.5 kHz 12.5 kHz
120 Hz 2.5 kHz 15.0 kHz
Level
Q
–06 to –06 to –06 to
+06
+06
+06
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
Q0.5
Q1.0
Q1.5
Q2.0
Q0.75
Q1.0
Q1.25
Q1.5
Q0.75
Q1.25
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering the title.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other sound
characteristics.
The adjustment made will be stored automatically.
4
Finish the procedure.
To erase the entire title
In step 2 above...
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnIlNoaGd.S 21
Bluetooth settings
You can change the settings listed on the right column
according to your preference.
Setting menu ( : Initial)
AUTO CNNCT (connect)
When the unit is turned on, the connection is
established automatically with...
1
Select “BT-PHONE” or “BT-AUDIO.”
Enter the Bluetooth menu.
OFF:
No Bluetooth device.
2
LAST: The last connected Bluetooth device.
ORDER: The available registered Bluetooth device
found at first.
AUTO ANSWER
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
3
4
Select “SETTINGS.”
ON:
The unit answers the incoming calls
automatically.
OFF:
The unit does not answer the calls
automatically. Answer the calls manually.
Select a setting item.
REJECT: The unit rejects all incoming calls.
MSG INFO (message info)
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
AUTOMATIC: The unit informs you of the arrival of
a message by ringing and displaying
“RCV MESSAGE” (receiving message).
• The display illuminate in blue (see
“RING COLOR” on page 24).
1
*
*
Appears only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected.
Appears only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected and it is compatible with text message
(notified through JVC Bluetooth adapter).
Bluetooth Audio: Shows only “Version.”
2
3
MANUAL: The unit does not inform you of the
arrival of a message.
*
MIC SETTING (microphone setting)
Only for the device being connected for “BT-PHONE.”
Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth
adapter, [LEVEL 01/02/03].
5
Change the setting accordingly.
VERSION
The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are
shown.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [4].
Cancels.
demonstration • DEMO OFF
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON
Clock display
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [4].
[Initial: 1:00]
CLOCK ADJ*2
Clock adjustment
• AUTO
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the clock
data provided via the satellite radio channel.
Cancels.
• OFF
:
TIME ZONE*2, *3
:
Select your residential area from one of the time zones for clock adjustment.
Time zone
EASTERN, ATLANTIC, NEWFOUND, ALASKA, PACIFIC, MOUNTAIN, CENTRAL
DST*2, *3
Daylight savings
time
• DST ON
:
Activates daylight savings time if your residential area is
subject to DST.
Cancels.
• DST OFF
:
EQ
Equalizer
:
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*4
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio is connected.
Displayed only when “CLOCK ADJ” is set to “AUTO.”
2
3
4
*
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnIloNaGd.S 23
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
TAG DISPLAY
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
AREA
Tuner channel
interval
• AREA US
• AREA EU
• AREA SA
:
:
:
When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals
are set to 10 kHz/200 kHz.
When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to
9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).
When using in South American countries where FM interval is
100 kHz. AM interval is set to 10 kHz.
MONO*5
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
• MONO OFF
:
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo
effect will be lost, [8].
Restore the stereo effect.
SID*6
SIRIUS ID
:
Your SIRIUS identification number scrolls on the display 5 seconds after “SID” is
selected, [16].
If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the unit return to playback mode.
BLEND HOLD*7 • AUTO
HD Radio • DIGITAL
reception mode • ANALOG
:
:
:
Switch between digital and analog audio automatically, [14].
Tuning to digital audio only.
Tuning to analog audio only.
IF BAND
Intermediate
frequency band • WIDE
• AUTO
:
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
:
COLOR 01
– COLOR 29,
USER
:
Select one of the preset or user color for display and button (except EQ/
/0) illumination.
(See also page 26 for USER color setting.)
MENU COLOR
Menu color
• OFF
• ON
:
:
Cancels.
Changes the display and button (except EQ/
/0)
illumination during menu, list search and playback mode
operations.
RING COLOR*8 • OFF
Ring color • ON
:
:
Cancels.
When a call comes in, the display will flash in blue.
• The display will change to the original color when the call is
answered or the incoming call stops.
When the unit receive a text message, the display only
illuminate in blue.
5
6
7
8
*
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM” or “HD Radio.”
Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio is connected.
Displayed only when HD Radio tuner box is connected.
Displayed only when Bluetooth adapter, KS-BTA200 is connected.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
FADER*9
Fader
R06 – F06
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
BALANCE*10
Balance
L06 – R06
:
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.
VOL ADJUST
Volume adjust
VOL ADJ –05 —
VOL ADJ +05
:
Preset the volume adjustment level of each source (except
FM), compared to the FM volume level. The volume level
[Initial: VOL ADJ 00] will automatically increase or decrease when you change
the source.
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you
want to adjust.
• “VOL ADJ FIX” appears on the display if “FM” is selected
as the source.
L/O MODE
Line output mode
• SUB.W
• REAR
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for
connecting a subwoofer (through an external amplifier).
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for
connecting the speakers (through an external amplifier).
SUB.W FREQ*11 • LOW
Subwoofer cutoff • MID
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 72 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 111 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 157 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
frequency
• HIGH
SUB.W LEVEL*11 SUB.W 00 —
Subwoofer level SUB.W 08
:
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
[Initial: SUB.W 04]
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*12
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
9
*
*
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
10 This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.
11
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
12
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndSDEoTwTnIloNaGd.S 25
Category Menu items
Selectable setting, [reference page]
AM*13
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [5].
15
EXT IN*14,
*
• CH / IPOD
• EXT INPUT
:
:
To use a JVC CD changer, [15], or an Apple iPod, [18].
To connect portable audio player to the CD changer jack,
[19].
External input
AUX IN*16
Auxiliary input
• AUX OFF
• AUX ON
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [5].
13
14
15
16
*
*
*
*
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, Bluetooth, HD Radio, or AUX IN.
Not required for HD Radio broadcast/SIRIUS/XM tuners and Bluetooth.
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
Color settings
Creating your own color
—USER Color
You can create your own colors—“DAY COLOR” or
“NIGHT COLOR.”
DAY COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER OFF.”
NIGHT COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER ON.”
5
6
Select a primary color.
[Turn] = [Press]
Adjust the level (00 to 31) of the selected
primary color.
1
[Turn] = [Press]
2
3
4
Select “COLOR” = “USER.”
[Turn] = [Press]
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust other primary
colors.
Exit from the setting.
While “USER” is shown on the display...
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
26 SDEoTwTnINloaGdSfrom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More about this unit
Basic operations
Disc operations
Turning on the power
Caution for DualDisc playback
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
General
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA
formats.
General
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as
those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD
(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
Bluetooth operations
General
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on the
circumstances around you.
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• ERROR CNNCT (Error Connection):
The device is registered but the connection has failed.
Use “CONNECT” to connect the device again. (See
page 12.)
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• ERROR
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
Try the operation again. If “ERROR” appears again,
check if the device supports the function you have
tried.
• UNFOUND
No available Bluetooth device is detected by
“SEARCH.”
• LOADING
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
The unit is updating the phone book*.
* Displays only when your cellular phone is equipped
with these functions and is compatible with this unit.
• PLEASE WAIT
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• If the text information includes more than 11
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can
display up to 40 characters.
The unit is preparing to use the Bluetooth function. If
the message does not disappear, turn off and turn on
the unit, then connect the device again (or reset the
unit).
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc.
co.jp/english/car/> (English website only)
• RESET 8
Check the connection between the adapter and this
unit.
Satellite radio
Title assignment
• To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or to sign
up, visit <http://www.sirius.com>.
• For the latest channel listings and programming
information, or to sign up for XM Satellite radio, visit
<http://www.xmradio.com>.
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
Menu operations
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
iPod
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod nano*1
– iPod video (5th Generation)*2
– iPod classic 2007*2
– iPod nano (3rd Generation)*2
1
*
When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu.
2
*
REFERENCES 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 26).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 26).
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit. The unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio device at a time.
While connecting a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected
device and search again.
• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select “OPEN” on the unit to connect
the device. (See page 11.)
• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device.
• Select the device name from “SPECIAL,” then try to
connect again. (See page 11.)
• Try to pair/connect from the Bluetooth device.
• Echo or noise occurs.
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Phone sound quality is poor.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the
Bluetooth cellular phone.
• Move the car to a place where you can get a better
signal reception.
* For Bluetooth operations, refer also to the instructions supplied with the Bluetooth Adapter.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• The sound is interrupted or skipped during • Reduce the distance between the unit and the
playback of a Bluetooth audio device.
Bluetooth audio device.
• Disconnect the device connected for “BT-PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the
device again.
• The connected audio device cannot be
controlled.
Check whether the connected audio device supports
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile).
• Sound quality changes when receiving
HD Radio stations.
Fix the reception mode either to “DIGITAL” or “ANALOG”
(see pages 14 and 24).
• No sound can be heard.
• “ANALOG” is selected when receiving all digital
broadcast of HD Radio station. Select “DIGITAL” or
“AUTO” (see pages 14 and 24).
• “DIGITAL” is selected when receiving weak digital
signals or receiving conventional radio broadcast.
Select “ANALOG” or “AUTO” (see pages 14
and 24).
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Reconnect this unit and the HD Radio tuner box correctly,
then reset the unit.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “NO MAGAZINE” appears on the display.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• “CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE”
scrolls on the display while listening to the
SIRIUS Satellite radio.
Starts subscribing to SIRIUS Satellite radio (see page 16).
• No sound can be heard. “UPDATING”
appears on the display.
The unit is updating the channel information and it takes
a few minutes to complete.
• “NO SIGNAL” appears on the display.
Move to an area where signals are stronger.
• “NO ANTENNA” or “ANTENNA”appears on Connect the antenna firmly.
the display.
• “NO CHANNEL” appears on the display
for about 5 seconds, then returns to the
previous display while listening to the
SIRIUS Satellite radio.
No broadcast on the selected channel.
Select another channel or continue listening to the
previous channel.
• “NO (information)*” scrolls on the display No text information for the selected channel.
while listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.
• “---” appears on the display while listening
to the XM Satellite radio.
• “---” appears on the display for about
2 seconds, then returns to the previous
Selected channel is no longer available or is
unauthorized.
channel while listening to the XM Satellite Select another channel or continue listening to the
radio.
previous channel.
• “OFF AIR” appears on the display while
listening to the XM Satellite radio.
Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time.
Select another channel or continue listening to the
previous channel.
• “LOADING” appears on the display while
listening to the XM Satellite radio.
The unit is loading the channel information and audio.
Text information are temporarily unavailable.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
• Satellite radio does not work at all.
Reconnect this unit and the satellite radio correctly and
reset this unit.
* NO CATEGORY, NO ARTIST, NO COMPOSER, and NO SONG/PROGRAM.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work. • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
• The sound is distorted.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
• “NO IPOD” appears on the display.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Charge the battery.
• Playback stops.
The headphones are disconnected during playback.
Restart the playback operation (see page 18).
• No sound can be heard when connecting
an iPod nano.
• Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod.
Then, connect it again.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Victor
Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
• HD Radio™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
• “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo are registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
• XM and its corresponding logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
• “SAT Radio,” the SAT Radio logo and all related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc., and XM
Satellite Radio, Inc.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD
—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
REFERENCES 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Power Output:
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4 Ω
and ≤ 1% THD+N
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Load Impedance:
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz)
Q0.5, Q1.0, Q1.5, Q2.0
Middle:
Treble:
12 dB (500 Hz, 1.0 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz)
Q0.75, Q1.0, Q1.25, Q1.5
12 dB (7.5 kHz, 10.0 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
15.0 kHz)
Q0.75, Q1.25
Frequency Response:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, CD changer jack,
Antenna input
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM: with channel interval set to 100 kHz 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
or 200 kHz
with channel interval set to 50 kHz 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
AM: with channel interval set to 10 kHz 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
with channel interval set to 9 kHz 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
35 dB
AM Tuner
Sensitivity:
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
96 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Grounding System:
Negative ground
Allowable Operating Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 6-5/16”)
Panel Size:
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
(7-7/16” × 2-5/16” × 1/4”)
Mass:
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) (excluding accessories)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.
REFERENCES 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Still having trouble??
USA ONLY
Call 1-800-252-5722
http://www.jvc.com
We can help you!
EN, SP
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0709DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-S26
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual de instalación/conexión
0709DTSMDTJEIN
EN, SP
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0642-002A
[J]
ENGLISH
ESPAÑOL
PREPARATIONS / PREPARATIVOS
You need the installation kits which corresponds to your car. / Utilice los kits de instalación que correspondan a su vehículo.
• Mark all the check boxes ( ) to make sure you have follow the instructions and the listed parts. / Marque todas las casillas ( ) para cerciorarse de que se han seguido las instrucciones, y de tener
las piezas mencionadas.
Check the battery system in your car / Verifique el sistema de batería de su vehículo
12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground / 12 V CC, NEGATIVO a masa
Prepare this before installation / Prepare esto antes de la instalación
Parts list for installation and connection / Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión
D
A
B
C
Power cord / Cordón
de alimentación
Control panel /
Panel de control
Sleeve / Cubierta
Trim plate / Placa
de guarnición
G
E
F
Battery / Pila
Handles / Manijas
Remote controller / Control remoto
INSTALLATION / INSTALACION
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying
kits. / La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC
de equipos de audio para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas.
In-dash mounting / Montaje en el tablero de instrumentos
Removing the unit / Extracción de la unidad
Release the rear section first... / Primero libere la
sección trasera...
See “ELECTRICAL CONNCECTIONS”
on page 2. / Véase “CONEXIONES
ELÉCTRICAS” en la página 2.
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections / PRECAUCIONES
sobre las conexiones de la fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar la
cubierta
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad
en su lugar.
8 mm (3/8" / 3/8 pulgada)
Flat head screws / Tornillos tipo plano—
2
M5 × 8 mm (3/8" / 3/8 pulgada)
*
Pocket /
Compartimiento
2
Bracket / Ménsula
*
1
1
*
*
Al poner la unidad vertical, tenga cuidado de no dañar el fusible provisto en la parte posterior.
No suministrado con esta unidad.
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
2
2
TROUBLESHOOTING / LOCALIZACIÓN DE AVERIAS
• The fuse blows. ] Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on. ] Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers. ] Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• El fusible se quema. ] ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?
• No es posible conectar la alimentación. ] ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?
• No sale sonido de los altavoces. ] ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?
• Sound is distorted. ] Is the speaker output lead grounded? ; Are the “–” terminals of L and R • El sonido presenta distorsión. ] ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa? / ¿Están
speakers grounded in common?
los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una masa común?
• Noise interfere with sounds. ] Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis
• Perturbación de ruido. ] ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil
using shorter and thicker cords?
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?
• This unit becomes hot. ] Is the speaker output lead grounded? ; Are the “–” terminals of L
• La unidad se calienta. ] ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa? / ¿Están los
and R speakers grounded in common?
terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una masa común?
• This unit does not work at all. ] Have you reset your unit?
• Este receptor no funciona en absoluto. ] ¿Reinicializó el receptor?
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS / CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS
Make sure to disconnect the battery’s negative terminal. / Asegúrese de desconectar el terminal negativo de la batería.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. / Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis
del automóvil después de la instalación.
High / Alta
Note / Nota:
Heat sink / Sumidero térmico
It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS). / Se
recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima de más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia de 4 Ω a 8 Ω). Si la potencia
máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie “AMP GAIN” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 25 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / Conexión de los amplificadores o
subwoofer externos
To the blue (white stripe) cable
of the unit / Al cable azul (rayas
blancas) de la unidad
Y-connector / Conector en Y* 4
Remote lead / Cable remoto
JVC Amplifier
Signal cord /
Cable de señal
Reset the unit / Reinicialice el
receptor
Rear speakers or Subwoofer (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) /
Altavoces traseros o subwoofer (Consulte la página 25 del MANUAL
DE INSTRUCCIONES.)
4
*
Amplificador de
JVC
IMPORTANT / IMPORTANTE
Antenna terminal / Terminal de la antena
Rear ground terminal /
Terminal de tierra posterior
RECOMMENDED CONNECTION /
CONEXIÓN RECOMENDADA
Custom wiring harness
*
*
4 / Mazo
CD changer jack /
Jack para el cambiador de CD
4
de cables personalizado
15 A fuse / Fusible de 15 A
Black / Negro
White / Blanco
To the metallic body or chassis of the car / A un
cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Front speaker (left) /
Altavoz delantero (izquierdo)
Ignition switch /
Interruptor de encendido
White (black stripe) / Blanco (rayas negras)
Yellow /
5
Gray / Gris
Amarillo
*
To a live terminal (constant 12 V) / A un
terminal activo (12 V constantes)
Front speaker (right) /
Altavoz delantero (derecho)
Gray (black stripe) / Gris (rayas negras)
Green / Verde
Red / Rojo
To an accessory terminal / A un terminal
Fuse block /
Bloque de fusibles
Rear speaker (left) /
Altavoz trasero (izquierdo)
Green (black stripe) / Verde (rayas negras)
Purple / Púrpura
para accesorios
Blue (white stripe) /
Azul (rayas blancas)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
(200 mA max.) / Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena
automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)
Rear speaker (right) /
Altavoz trasero (derecho)
Purple (black stripe) / Púrpura (rayas negras)
Connecting the external components in series / Conexión de componentes externos en serie
When connecting the external components, refer also to the manuals supplied for the components and adapter. / Cuando conecte componentes externos, consulte, también, los manuales
suministrados con los componentes y el adaptador.
Not recommended... / No recomendado...
CD changer jack of the unit /
Jack del cambiador de CD de
la unidad
Two components / Dos componentes :
6
6,
7
8
A
KT-HD300* / KS-SRA100* * / KS-BTA200 / XMDJVC100 / CNP2000UC*
Caution / Precaucion:
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit
is turned off. / Antes de conectar los componentes externos, asegúrese
de que la unidad esté apagada.
9
B* CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58
To disconnect the
connector / Para
desconectar el cable
Three components / Tres componentes :
6
6,
7
8
A
B
KT-HD300* / KS-SRA100* * / XMDJVC100 / CNP2000UC*
KS-BTA200
9
C* KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58
You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer jack. / Puede conectar los siguientes componentes JVC al jack del cambiador de CD.
JVC component / Componente JVC
Model name / Nombre del modelo
CD changer (CD-CH) / Cambiador de CD (CD-CH)
HD Radio tuner box / Sintonizador HD Radio™
CH-X1500, etc.
KT-HD300
TM
You can also connect the following components through the various JVC adapters or system. / También puede conectar los siguientes componentes a través de los diversos adaptadores o sistema JVC.
Connection cords may need to be purchased separately. / Puede ser necesario comprar los cables de conexión por separado.
•
Component / Componente
Adapter/System / Adaptador/Sistema
Bluetooth adapter / Adaptador Bluetooth
Interface adapter for iPod / Adaptador de interfaz para iPod KS-PD100
Model name / Nombre del modelo
Bluetooth device / Dispositivo Bluetooth
iPod / iPod
KS-BTA200
XMDirect™ Tuner Box / XMDirect™ Tuner Box
XMDirect2 Tuner System / Sistema de sintonizador XMDirect2
SIRIUS satellite radio / Radio por satélite SIRIUS
SIRIUS satellite radio / Radio por satélite SIRIUS
Smart Digital Adapter / Adaptador digital inteligente
XM satellite radio System / Sistema de radio XM Satellite
SIRIUS satellite radio System / Sistema de radio satelital SIRIUS SC-C1, KS-SRA100
XMDJVC100
CNP2000UC, CNPJVC1
SIRIUS satellite radio System / Sistema de radio satelital SIRIUS PnP, SC-VDOC1, KS-SRA100
Portable audio player with line output jacks / Reproductor de audio portátil con jacks de salida de línea Line input adapter / Adaptador de entrada por línea
KS-U57
Portable audio player with 3.5 mm (3/16") stereo mini jack / Reproductor de audio portátil con
jack mini estéreo de 3,5 mm (3/16 pulgada)
AUX input adapter / Adaptador de entrada AUX
KS-U58
XM Radio and SIRIUS satellite radio cannot be used together. / No puede utilizar juntas la radio XM y la radio satelital SIRIUS.
• HD Radio™ is a proprietary trademark of iBiquity Digital Corp. / HD Radio™ es una marca comercial de iBiquity Digital Corp.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. / iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y otros países.
3
4
5
3
*
*
*
Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a un lugar no cubierto con pintura.
No suministrado con esta unidad.
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint.
Not supplied for this unit.
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected; otherwise,
the power cannot be turned on.
You need to connect the power cord supplied for the component separately.
This model is a component of SIRIUS satellite radio System.
This model is a component of XM satellite radio System.
4
5
Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa a de la instalación, es necesario conectar este
cable, de lo contrario no se podrá conectar la alimentación.
*
*
6
7
8
9
*
*
*
*
Es necesario conectar, aparte, el cable de alimentación suministrado con el componente.
Este modelo es un componente del sistema de radio satelital SIRIUS.
Este modelo es un componente del sistema de radio XM Satellite.
Para utilizar estos componentes, configure el ajuste de entrada externa correctamente (consulte la página
26 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
6
7
8
9
*
*
*
*
To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 26 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|